giao an TIENG ANH 8 ca nam

Bạn đang xem bản rút gọn của tài liệu. Xem và tải ngay bản đầy đủ của tài liệu tại đây (941.48 KB, 270 trang )

(1)Date of prepare: ……………………. Class 8A. Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Class 8B. Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Period 01. REVISION I. AIMS 1. Knowledge: - To introduce something about English book 8 and how to learn. - To review some basic structures and practice gammar in the exercises. - Structure of English book 8 - Revision + Tenses: Past simple, past progressive, future simple + Comparison + Modal verbs: Can, could, may.... 2. Skills: - Practice speaking and listening. 3. Attitude: - Like subject and love friends. II.TEACHING AIDS 1.Teacher: Teacher’s book, students’ book, plan. 2. Students: book, notebooks, pens... III. PROCEDURES 1. Check the old lesson. - No check 2. New lesson: - Introduce the new lesson. (1’) Teacher’ activities Ss’ activities I. Warm up (2’) - Ask Ss some questions. - Listen & answer +, How are you to day? +, How many people are there in your class? …….. II. Introduction (4’) - Introduce somethings - Listen about English book 8. Last year, you have learned English 7. Same the English 6,7 in English 8, there are 16 units, and each unit has four sections such as: Reading, Listening, Writing & Speaking.. Contents. 1. Presentation English 8.

(2) After each unit, you will see language focus what you can summary the grammar. In each term, you have two forty-five minutes tests and two tests of 15 minutes. III. Revision (35’) - Asks Ss to repeat some - Listen & prepare basic grammar structures. - Ask Ss to retell present - Retell simple.. - Ask students to make examples.. - Make sentences. - Ask Ss to complete some sentences.. - Do exercise. - Call some students to go to the board and write the answer. - Check them. - Go to the board & complete. - Ask Ss to retell present progressive tense. - Give some examples: I am standing We are learning English. She is speaking ?What tense do you know? - Write form and using on the board. - Asks to give more examples. - Retell.. - Ask students to do exercise. - Complete exercise. - Listen & correct. 2. Revision: a. The present simple tense. + Form: S + V(s, es) + Use: Express an action happens in the present or true. + Exs: I live in Ha Giang She lives in Ha Noi * Exercise 1: Complete the sentences. a/ Lan........(live) on Nguyen Trai street. b/ I often.....(play) soccer in the afternoon. c/ What.....(do) your mother do? d/ He ......(miss) his parents. * Key: 1. lives; 2. play; 3. does; 4. misses b. Present progressive tense.. - Look at the examples. - Answer - Copy down - Give examples. + Form: S + be +V- ing + Use: Express an action happening at the moment of speaking. * Exercise 2: Chose the best answers. 1. They............. marbles now..

(3) - Call on students answer. - Correct. - Ask Ss to retell form & use of future simple tense.. - Answer - Correct - Retell. A. plays B. play C. are playing 2. She........to do her Math homework at the moment. A. trying B. to try C. is trying 3. What.......Lan.......? A. are do B. does C. is doing * Key: 1- C; 2- C; 3- C 3. The future simple. + Form: S + will + V. - Ask Ss to give examples. - Give examples. - Ask Ss to do exercise.. - Do exercise. - Call on students answer. - Answer. - Correct. - Correct. - Ask Ss to retell past simple tense. - Give some examples: I watched T.V yesterday. My mother bought a new pen for me yesterday. ? What tense do you know? - Write form and using on the board. - Ask students to give ex - Ask Ss to complete exercise 4. - Retell.. - Correct if there is any. - Correct. - Look at and answer. + Use: Express an action in the future. Ex: I will go to the movie this evening. * Exercise 3: Using “will” + V to complete folowing sentences. a. You......(be) late for school. b. What..... they .....(do)? c. I.........(see) you tomorrow * Key: a. will be; b. will do; c. will see 4. Past simple tense. + Form: S + V(ed) irregular + Use: Express an action happened in the past.. - Copy down - Give examples - Do exercise 4. * Exercise 4: Complete sentences a. I.......(do not) buy it. b. Hoa.......(go) to the chess club last night. c. They ......(visit) Ha Long Bay last summer * Key: a. did not; b. went; c. visited.

(4) mistakes. - Ask Ss to retell the form of modal verbs. - Give examples. - Listen & copy down - Give examples. 5. Modal verds. + Form: S + Modal verd + V Exs: You must slow down. Can I help you? You should go to the dentist. 3. Consolidation: (2') - The structure of English book 8 - Basic structures 4. Home work: (1') - Learn by heart structures. - Make sentences - Read: Unit 1: Getting started - Listen and read. ************************************ Date of prepare: ……………………. Class 8A. Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Class 8B. Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Period 02. Unit 1: MY FRIENDS Getting Started - Listen and Read I. AIMS 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson, students will be able to revise favorite activities. - To describe people. - Vocabulary: (to) receive , enough , smile - Grammar: + What do/ does … look like? + (not) enough to do something. + What + (a/ an) + adj + n! 2. Skills: - To practice discussing, listening and reading comprehension. 3. Attitude: - Love friends and like subject II. TEACHING AIDS 1. Teacher: Teacher’s book, cassettle, CD, plan. 2. Students: Books, notebooks, pens. III. PROCEDURES 1. Check the old lesson. - No check.

(5) 2. New lesson. - Introduce the new lesson. (1’) Teacher’ activities I. Warm up (5’) - Ask Ss some questions about their holiday. + What do you often do during the summer vacation? + Do you want to meet your teachers and friends after the vacation? + What do you say when you meet them again? II. Presentation (8’) - Asks Ss to look at the pictures (page 10) then ask some questions. Ex: a) How many people are there in the picture? ? Where are they? ? What are they doing? ? Are they all boys? ? What time of the day do you think it is? ? Do girls play soccer? ? Do you like soccer? - Now you work in pairs. Describe pictures base on the questions above - Ask Ss about their activites in their free time. Exs: ? What are your favorite after- school activities? ? Who do you like to play with? Boy or girls? In a group or individually?... * Pre-teaching (28’) - Asks Ss to tell something about Hoa. - Do you remember Hoa? - Where does she come from? - Who does she live with. Ss’ activities. Contents. - Answer. - Listen & answer. I. Getting started: - read books, newspapers, magazines … - play games, sports … - listen to music - watch TV, movies …. - Practice in pairs - Listen & answer:. - Listen and answer. II. Listen and read..

(6) now? - Which grade is she in? - Introduces the situation and asks students to listen to the tape and get information about Nien - Introduces some new words. * While-teaching: - Turns on the tape - Ask students to listen and repeat - Introduces the structure. - Listen. - Listen & write. a. New words: - (to) receive: - enough: - smile: - (to) seem:. - Listen - Listen and repaet - Write down. b. New structure: (1) What does she look like? She is beautiful What + do/ does + S + look like?. => Describle people Ex: What does Lan look like? She is tall and thin (2) She wasn’t old enough to be in my class (not) adjective + enough + to-ifinitive - Asks some pairs to practice reading.. - Practice in pairs. 1. Practice the dialogue with a partner. - Correct then asks Ss to read again and answer questions. - Asks some pairs to practice - Correct. - Listen and read then answer. 2. Answer the questions. - Work in pairs - Write. *Answers key: a) She lives in Hue b) No, she doesn’t c) “she wasn’t old enough to.

(7) * Post-teaching: - You have asked and answer about Lan and Hoa. Now you make up a new dialogue using the oranginal dialogues as prompts. - Call on some pairs practice. - Corrects. - Listen & prepare. - Work in pairs - Write. be in my class” d) She is going to visit Hoa at Christmas. 3. Further practice. Nam: Hello, Long. Long: Hi, Nam. You look very happy. Nam: I am. I got a letter from my friend Minh today. Long: Do I know him? Nam: I don’t think so. He was my next door neighbor in HaNoi. Long: What does he look like? Nam: He’s handsome. 3. Consolidation: (2') - T retell the contents of the lesson. 4. Homework: (1') - Read and translate the dialogue again. - Do exercises 1, 2 on page 5 in workbook. - Read (Unit 1- Speak - Listen). ********************************** Date of prepare: ……………………. Class 8A. Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Class 8B. Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Period 03. Unit 1: MY FRIENDS (Cont') Speak & Listen I. AIMS 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson, Ss’ll be able to practice describing the appearance of the people in the pictures and complete the dialogue by listening..

(8) - Vocabulary: Curly, bald, blond, fair, dark. - Grammar: How to describe a person. 2. Skills: - To develop speaking & listening skills. - Revision expression 3. Attitude: - Love friends and like subject II. TEACHING AIDS 1. Teacher: Teacher’s book, plan, picture, cassette and disk. 2. Students: Student’s books, notebooks. III. PROCEDURES 1. Check the old lesson. (4') - Read and answer the questions (the conversation between Lan & Hoa). 2. New lesson: Introduce the new lesson. (1’). Teacher’ activities Ss’ activities Contents I. Warm up (2’) - Ask Ss to think of the - Give the adjectives adjectives used to describe used to describe build and hair they have learned. II. Presetation (35’) 1. Speak I. Speak. - Introduces some new - Listen * New words: words in part 2 (p11). - build (n): - straight (adj): - Write on the board & ask - Write & read - curly (adj): students to read. - bald (adj): - dark (adj): - blond/ fair (adj): - Show the picture of - Describe Mary. 1. Read the dialogue Mary & ask them to Ex: She has long blond hair. describe her hair & build. She is short and thin. - Ask Ss to practice the - Work in pairs. dialogue in part 1. S + have/ has + adj + hair - Explain the structures: - Listen & copy S + be + adjective “to be” and “to have” down.. - Introduces six pics (11, - Look at & listen. 2. Now take turn to make similar dialogues. Use.

(9) 12) explains how to do then asks Ss to practice in pairs. - Asks some pairs to - Work in pairs. practice - Corrects - Listen & correct. adjectives in the table. Ex: S1: This person is short and thin. She has long black hair. S2: Is this Mary? S1: Yes.. 2. Lisen - How do people greet one another? Hi. Hello. Nice to meet you. It’s a pleasure to meet you. How are you? How do you do? + To be introduced one another, we use: I’d like to meet … Come and meet + To respond, we use: Nice to meet you. It’s a pleasure to meet you. - Practice and read the expression in the box. - Ask Ss to scan four dialogues and guess. * While-listening. - Let Ss listen to the tape twice. - Compare with their prediction. - Call on students to answer. - Give feetback.. 2. Listen. + Greet one another - Hi. - Hello. - Nice to meet you. - It’s a pleasure to meet you. - How are you? - How do you do? + To be introduced one another, we use: - I’d like to meet … - Come and meet + To respond, we use: - Nice to meet you. - It’s a pleasure to meet you.. - Listen & answer.. - Listen & write. - Listen - Listen & read - Read & prediction - Listen to the tape and check their prediction - Answer - Listen & write. - Practice the completed - Practise dialogues. 3. Consolidation. (2') - Speaking & listening skill. - Practice describing a person. Answer keys: 1) I’d like to meet. 2) Nice to meet you. 3) I’d like to meet. 4) It’s a pleasure to meet you. 5) Come and meet. 6) How do you do?.

(10) 4. Homework. (1') - Make conversation. - Do exercises 3, 4, 5. (p6, 7, 8) in workbook. - Read and prepare (Unit 1 - Read)..

(11) Date of prepare: ……………………. Class 8A. Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Class 8B. Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Period 04. Unit 1: MY FRIENDS (Cont') Read I. AIMS.

(12) 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson, Ss’ ll be able to practice describing character some one, ask and answer the questions. - Vocabulary: However, volunteer, extremely, orphanage, reserved, peace, sense of humor, joke, out going. - Grammar: Revision + (not) + adj + enough + to - infinitive 2. Skills: - To develop reading comprehension. 3. Attitude: - Love friends and like subject. II. TEACHING AIDS. 1. Teacher: Teacher’s book, plan, cassette and CD 2. Students: Student’s books, notebooks. III. PROCEDURES. 1. Check the old lesson. (4') - Do exercise 3(p6) in workbook to describle people in the pictures. - Correct and give marks. 2. New lesson: Introduce the new lesson. (1’) Teacher’ activities I. Warm up (4’) - Ask Ss some questions: Who usually helps other people in your class? Who usually tells funny? Who doesn’t speak alot in puplic? Who smile a lot?. Ss’ activities - Listen & answer. Contents.

(13) II. Presentation (33’) * Pre - reading - This games tells you the - Listen to the teacher characters of people in the introduce then answer. class. Which adjectives do you use to describe the one who always help other people or the one who always tells jokes? - Explain some new words in - Copy down 1. New words: the reading. - volunteer (v): - extremely (adv): - orphanage (n): - reserved (adj): - sense of humor (n): - humorous (adj): - joke (n): - Have them model sentence - Listen and write 2. Model sentence down - I’m lucky enough to have a lot of friends. - You are going to read the - Look at the pictures text about Ba’s friends. Each and answer one has his own characters. You scan the reading and answer the questions from text book. * While-reading: - Asks Ss to read the text - Read silently. - Call some Ss to read aloud. - Read aloud. - Asks Ss to read the text - Read again to do the again and do exercise 1 task. - Asks some Ss to read their - Answer answers 3. Exercises - Corrects - Correct * Exercise1: a) - A b) - C c) - B d) - D * Exercise 2: Asks Ss to read the text - Read & answer again and do exercise 2 - Asks some Ss to read their - Answer answers a) Ba feels lucky having a - Corrects - Correct lot of friends b) Bao is the most sociable. c) Khai likes reading. d) A bad thing about Ba’s jokes is (that) sometimes.

(14) * Post-reading: - Ask Ss to read the text aloud. - Ask Ss to discuss in groups answer thequestion f in the book. (compare your character with your close friends) - Call on Ss to answer. - Correct. his jokes annoy his friends. e) He spends his freetime doing volunteer work at a local orphanage. 4. Further practice - Read aloud - Discuss & answer. - Answer - Correct down. &. - How many close friends do you have? - Who are they? - What do they look likes - What are they like? …….. write. 3. Consolidation. (2') - Reading comprehension. - Revision grammar point. 4. Homework. (1') - Read, answer the questions - Do exercise 6 (p10) in workbook. - Read and prepare (Unit 1- Write). *********************************** Date of prepare: …………………….. Class 8A. Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Class 8B. Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Period 05. Unit 1: MY FRIENDS (Cont') Write I. AIMS 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson, Ss’ ll be able to continue the topic about describing a person and practice writing. - Vocabulary: Adjectives about character and appearance - Grammar: The simple present tense (review). 2. Skills: - To develop writing skill. 3. Attitude: - Love friends and like subject. II. TEACHING AIDS. 1. Teacher: - Book, plan. 2. Students:.

(15) - Student’s books, notebooks. III. PROCEDURES. 1. Check the old lesson. (4') - Describe characters of your close friends using the questions: - Who are they? - What do they look like? 2. New lesson: Introduce the new lesson. (1’) Teacher’ activities I. Warm up (5’) - Controls students to play game “slap the board” with adjectives describing people. Ss’ activities - Practice in 2 groups. Contents Time Warm-hearted kind sociable reserve humorous. II. Presentation (32’) * Pre-writing - Ask Ss to look at Tam’s personal card (p15) then read it and tell me “What information is there on the card?” - Explain the meaning of some new words in the card. - Have Ss to read new words Base on these information, we have a paragraph describle Tam. - Call on Ss to read aloud the text about Tam. Can you tell me how Tam is described? - Asks Ss to read and practice asking and answering about Tam. Ex: What is his name?. - Look at, read & answer.. - Listen & copy down - Listen & repeat - Listen. - Read aloud. - Practice in pairs. 1. Read the information about Tam.. * New words. - appearance (n): - character (n): - helpful (adj): - elder >< younger:.

(16) His name’s Tam How old is he? He’s fourteen .................... * While – writing - Gives each Ss a form then asks them to practice in pairs: Asking and answering your friend then complete the form. - Asks Ss to use the form to practice writing about your friend. - Asks some students to read their writing. - Corrects.. - Work in pairs then complete the form.. 2. Fill in a similar form for your partner….. Name: Nguyen Van A Age: 15 Appearance: Tall, strong, short straight dark hair. - Practice writing. Character: Kind, hard working, humorous Address: 35 Nguyen Trai Street. - Read. Family: Mother, father, younger sister. - Correct Friends: Long, Manh.. * Post-writing - Base on the writing you have written. You write - Listen a paragaph about members in your family: your father, your mother.. - Call on Ss to read their writing - Read - Corrects - Correct. 3. Now write a paragraph about your partner. Ex: His name is Nguyen Van A and he is 15 years old. He lives at 35 Nguyen Trai Street with his mother, father and younger sister. He is tall, strong with short straight, dark hair. He is kind, humorous and hardworking. His best friends are Long and Manh.. 3. Consolidation. (2') - Retell the contents of the lesson. 4. Homework. (1') - Practice writing. - Do exercise 7 (p11) in workbook. - Read "Unit 1 - Language focus". *********************************************** Date of prepare: ……………………. Class 8A. Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Class 8B. Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: ……...

(17) Period 06. Unit 1: MY FRIENDS (Cont') Language focus I. AIMS 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson, students’ ll be able to review the simple tenses; describe people and the structure (not) adj enough to + V- infi. - Vocabulary: - Grammar: The present simple, present progressive, past simple (review). 2. Skills: - To practice doing exercises 3. Attitude: - Students more hardworking and like subject II. TEACHING AIDS. 1. Teacher: Teacher’s book, plan. 2. Students: Student’s books, notebooks. III. PROCEDURES. 1. Check the old lesson. (4') - Students go to the board read the writing about describing their close friends. 2. New lesson: Introduce the new lesson. (1’) Teacher’ activities Ss’ activities I. Warm up (4’) - Guide Ss to matching A - Go to the board & with B. match A with B - Control and correct II. Revision (10’) - Asks Ss to repeat the form - Repeat & copy and the use of present down simple, present progressive, past simple.. III. Practice (23’) - Asks Ss to do exercise 1: You read two passages and put the verbs in the present. - Listen & practice. Contents A 1. go 2. be 3. see 4. meet. B a . met b. went c.was d. saw. 1. Revision grammars + Present simple: S + V(s/es) Eg: She likes orange juice. + Present progressive: S + be + V- ing Eg: He is doing homework. + Past simple: S + V-ed Eg: I watched TV last night. 2. Practice Exercise 1:.

(18) simple tense and past simple tense. - Ask Ss to compare with a partner. - Call on students to answer. - Correct.. - Compare with a partner. - Answer - Correct. - Asks Ss to do exercise 2 complete the dialogue. - Asks Ss to practise in pairs - Controls and corrects. - Listen & complete. - Asks Ss to the picture exercise 3 (p17) & answer the questions - Asks some pairs to practice - Controls and corrects. - Look at & answer the questions. - Aks Ss to retell the structure: (not) adj enough + to + V- infinitive - Ask Ss to practice in pairs to do Ex4. - Call on students answer - Correct. - Retell.. - Work in pairs - Listen and copy. a) 1. is living; 2. sent 3. was; 4. is b) 1. are; 2. came; 3. showed; 4. introduced Exercise 2: Complete the dialogue. Use the correct form of the verbs in the box. 1 - sets 2 - goes 3 - moves Exercise 3:. 4 - is 5 - is 6 - is. - Practice. - Listen and take note. a) There are four people. b+c) - The man is standing next to the taxi is tall and fat. He’s wearing a yellow shirt and black trousers. - The woman is thin and short. She’s wearing a green skirt and red blouse. - The boy is thin. He is wearing a blue shorts and a white shirt. - The man standing next to the bus-stop is short. He’s wearing a pink shirt and blue trousers. Exercise 4:. - Listen & practice - Answer - Listen &copy. a) not big enough b) not old enough c) Strong enough good enough.

(19) 3. Consolidation. (2') - T retell the contents of the lesson. 4. Homework. (1') - Do the exercises again. - Make sentences. Read (Unit 2 - Getting started - Listen and read). ********************************************** Date of prepare: ……………………. Class 8A. Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Class 8B. Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Period 07. Unit 2. MAKING ARRANGEMENTS Getting started – Listen and read I. AIMS 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson, students’ll be able to use the telephone to make comfirm arranagement. - Vocabulary: Fax machine , answering machine - Grammar: + be going to talk about intention + Can/ Could I speak to ……, please ? + Would you like to …… ? 2. Skills: - To practice discussing, listening and reading comprehension. 3. Attitude: - Students more hardworking and like subject II. TEACHING AIDS. 1. Teacher: Book, plan, CD. 2. Students: Student’s books, notebooks. III. PROCEDURES. 1. Check the old lesson . - No check 2. New lesson: Introduce the new lesson. (1’) Teacher’ activities I. Warm up (4’) - Asks (Using real object and pictures) a) What is this ? b) When do we use it ? - It’s a phone /a telephone/ a mobile phone.... Ss’ activities - Look at, listen and answer. Contents.

(20) II. Presentaion (27’) - Asks Ss to look at the pictures (page 10) then practice matching - Controls and corrects.. - Work in groups - Correct. - Introduce the conversation - Listen & read then read. - Explain some new words - Copy down. - Revise some structures. - Revise & copy. - Read the conversation(p19) - Asks some pairs to practice reading. - Correct then asks Ss to read again and answer questions. - Asks some Ss to answer. - Correct. - Listen & repeat. III. Practice (10’) - Now you make up similar dialogue by changing some details of the original one Eg: names, telephone number & content of the. 1. Getting started. a) an answering machine b) a mobile phone c) a fax machine d) a telephone directory e) a public telephone f) an address book 2. Listen and read. * New words: - down stairs >< up stairs - hold on - a bit = a little - use (v): * Structure: - Can I speak to...., please? - Would you like....? - Let’s...... - I’m using my cousin’s bike tonight (action in the futrure ) a, Practice the dialogue with a partner. - Work in pairs - Read & answer the questions - Answer - Copy down. - Work inpairs. b, Read the dialogue again.... * Answer keys: a) Nga made the call b) Nga introduced herself c) Nga invited Hoa to ( go to) the movie d) Nga arranged a meeting place e) Hoa arranged the time. f) Nga agreed to the time 3. Practice. Ngoc: 897 6544 Ha: Can I speak to Ngoc, please. This is Ha. Ngoc: Hello, Ha.

(21) dialogue - Call on practice. some. pairs - Practice. Ha: I’m going to English club at 7.00 this evening. Would you like to come ? Ngoc: Of course. Let’s meet outside the club. Ha: That’s fine. See you at 6.45. Bye Ngoc: Bye. 3. Consolidation. (2') - T retell the contents of the lesson. - Ss listen and remember 4. Home work:(1') - Read and translate - Do execises 1, 2 - Read (Unit 2: Speak - Listen). Date of prepare: ……………………. Class 8A. Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Class 8B. Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Period 08. Unit 2. MAKING ARRANGEMENTS (Cont’) Speak I. AIMS 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson, students’ ll be able to practice making arrangements on the phone and fill in the missing information. - Vocabulary: band, pop concert - Grammar: - Revision expression. - Would you like to …? - Great me too. - I’m sorry I can’t., 2. Skills: - To develop speaking & listening skills 3. Attitude: - Students more hardworking and like subject II. TEACHING AIDS. 1. Teacher: Teacher’s book, plan, second board. 2. Students: Student’s books, notebooks, pens. III. PROCEDURES. 1. Check the old lesson .(5') - A student do ex 1 in workbook. 2. New lesson:.

(22) Introduce the new lesson. (1’) Teacher’ activities I. Warm up (4’) “Jumble words” - Explains how to do then asks Ss to practice in groups - Controls and corrects. II. Presentation (32’) * Pre - speaking. - This is a dialogue whose sentence aren’t in good order. Read & answer. ? Who made a call? ? Who invite the other? ? What’s for? - Asks Ss to read & put the sentences in correct order - Call on ss practice - Corrects.. Ss’ activities - Listen & Practice in groups - Listen. - Listen and answer. Jumble words + elpheoent rdetyioc -telephone directory + rgaenra - arrange + nodtureci - introduce. 1. Put the sentences in the correct order to make complete conversation. Pop concert Band – which band. - Read & do exersice - Practice in pairs - Write. - Call some pairs read aloud - Read * While - speaking : - Ask Ss to read opened - Read dialogue between Ba & Bao - Have Ss to complete the - Work in pairs dialogue in pairs - Correct - Correct & copy down. - Ask some pairs read the dialogue have completed. Contents. - Do as requested. * Post - speaking : - Make similar dialogue - Listen & practice in base on the example one( T. pairs goes around classroom help Ss) - Call on some pairs - Practice. * Answers 1- b; 2 - f ; 3 - j; 4 - a; 5 i; 6 - k; 7 - e; 8 - k; 9 - g; 10 - h; 11- d. 2. Complete the dialogue between Ba and Bao Bao : May I speak to Ba, please? This is Bao. Bao : I’m fine, thanks. And you ? Bao : Can you play chess tonight ? Bao : What about tomorrow afternoon? Bao: I’ll meet you at the Central Chess Club. Bao: Is 2.00 o’clock, OK? 3. Practise. A: Hello 456 890 B: Can I speak to A please?. This is B.

(23) present. - Correct & give sugess answer. - Correct. A: Hello B. How are you? B: I’m fine .Thanks. And you? A: I’m OK.Thanks. B: Can you play voleyball this afternoon? A: I’m sorry. I’m going to the Engilsh class. B: What about tomorrow afternoon?........ 3. Consolidation. (2') - T retell the contents of the lesson. - Ss listen and remember 4. Homework.(1') - Make conversation. - Do exercise 3, ( pages 16 - 18) in work book. - Read and prepare (Unit 2 - Listen). *************************************************** Date of prepare: ……………………. Class 8A. Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Class 8B. Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Period 09. Unit 2. MAKING ARRANGEMENTS (Cont’) Listen I. AIMS 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson, students’ ll be able to fill in the missing information. - Vocabulary: - Grammar: 2. Skills: - To develop listening skills 3. Attitude: - Students more hardworking and like subject II. TEACHING AIDS. 1. Teacher: book, plan, cassette and tape, second board. 2. Students: books, notebooks, pens. III. PROCEDURES. 1. Check the old lesson .(5') - A student do ex 3 in workbook. 2. New lesson: Introduce the new lesson. (1’).

(24) Teacher’ activities I. Warm up (4’) - T ask Ss some questions: How are you today? What is the wheather like today? What is your telephone number? II. Presentation (32’) * Pre - listening: - T ask Ss some questions: What will you say if you are the caller? What will you say if the person you want to speak to is out? * While - listening: - Read the conversation(3 times) - Asks some Ss to tell their answer. - Corrects - Read the conversation again. Ss’ activities - Listen and answer questions.. I. Listen - Listen and answer. * Fill in the missing information. - Read - Answer - Listen and check.. Date:............................ Time:........................... For: The principle Message : Mrs. Mary Nguyen wanted to see you at 9 . 45 in the morning Tel. number: 64683720942. - Read again.. * Post - listening : - Asks Ss to correct - Do exercise mistakes in the sentences of exercise.. - Controls and corrects. Contents. - Correct. * Other activities: Correct mistakes these sentences. a) Can I speak with Mr Trung, please? b) I’d like to do an apointement with the dentist? c) Would you like to live a message? d) He will be available in Monday. * Answers a) with - to b) do - make c) live - leave d) in - on.

(25) 3. Consolidation. (2') - T retell the contents of the lesson. 4. Homework.(1') - Make conversation. - Do exercise 4, ( pages 16 - 18) in work book. - Read and prepare (Unit 2 - Read). Date of prepare: ……………………. Class 8A. Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Class 8B. Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Period 10. Unit 2. MAKING ARRANGEMENTS (Cont’) Read I. AIMS 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson, students’ ll be able to know about Alexander Graham Bell and his invention. - Vocabulary: assistant, countless, device, conduct, commercial, deaf - mute, emigrate, experiment, transmit. - Grammar: + neither …… nor ……. 2. Skills: - To develop reading comprehension, checking true or fasle? 3. Attitude: - Students more hardworking and like subject II. TEACHING AIDS. 1. Teacher: Book, plan. 2. Students: Student’s books, notebooks, pens. III. PROCEDURES. 1. Check the old lesson .(4') - A student do ex 4 in workbook. 2. New lesson: Introduce the new lesson. (1’) Teacher’ activities I.Warm up (5’) - Ask Ss to read telephone numbers: - Correct. Ss’ activities - Practice - Listen. II. Presentation (32’) * Pre - reading - Have Ss to look at the - Look at & listen picture (p21). Contents Read telephone numbers 0219 3 863 786 8 235 674 8 104 234 8 905 601. I. Read.

(26) ? Who is in the picture? ? What’s do you know about him? ? What did he invent? When? - Ask Ss to read the passage quickly then answer the questions above. - Introduces some new words .. - Listen and read silently. - Listen & write down. - Guide Ss to read words.. - Listen & repeat. - Call on ss read aloud. - Practice. * While - reading: - Read the text (twice) - Asks Ss to read - Asks Ss to read the text again and do exercise 1. - Asks some Ss to read their answers - Corrects. - Listen - Read aloud - Read & do Ex 1. 1. New words. - assistant(n) - countless(adj) - device (n) - conduct (v) - commercial (adj) - deaf - mute(n) emigrate (v) - experiment (n) - transmit(v) 2. Exercises. -. Ex1: True or False.. - Asnswer - Correct & copy down. - Asks Ss to read the text - Read & do ex 2 again and do exercise 2. Put the events in the correct order. - Asks some Ss to read their - Answer answers. - Corrects. - Listen & copy down. a) F: The USA → Edinburgh b) F: in a hospital in Boston → at Boston University c) T d) F: 1877 → 1876 e) F: between deaf - mutes → X f) T Ex2: Put the events in the correct order. Alexander Graham Bell... d) was born in Scostland. e) went to live in Canada. a) went to live in the United States. g) worked with people neither speak nor hear. c) worked with Thomas Watson b) successfully demonstrated his inventions. f) invented the telephone. neither ….. nor …….

(27) * Post – reading: - Introduces some questions - Listen and answer 3. Practice. and asks Ss to answer. questions. Where did Alexander G.Bell was born? Alexander G. Bell was born Where did he work with in Edinburgh. deaf - mutes? He worked with deaf - mutes What did he invent? at Boston University. Who did he work with? He invented............ 3. Consolidation. (2') - T retell the contents of the lesson. - Ss listen and remember 4. Homework.(1') - Read, answer the questions - Do exercises 6, 7(p18-19) in work book. - Read and prepare (Unit 2 - write). *********************************************** Date of prepare: ..................................... Class 8A. Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Class 8B. Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Period 11. Unit 2. MAKING ARRANGEMENTS (Cont’) Write I. AIMS 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson, students’ ll be able to practice writing a message. - Vocabulary: furniture (n), delivery (n), customer (n) to be out, reach sb, midday, stationary (n), order (n) - Grammar: 2. Skills: - To develop writing skill. - Message form 3. Attitude: - Love their country and other countries which speak English. II. TEACHING AIDS. 1. Teacher: Teacher’s book, plan. 2. Students: Student’s books, notebooks, pens. III. PROCEDURES. 1. Check the old lesson .(5').

(28) - A student do ex 6 in workbook. 2. New lesson: Introduce the new lesson. (1’) Teacher’ activities I. Warm up (4’) - Have them play game: Reperition Drills. II. Presentation (32’) * Pre - writing - Ask ss to look at the message (p23) - Introduces exercise 1, asks Ss to read and answer: Who is this message for ? Who left this message ? Who took this message ? - Explain some new words.. Ss’ activities - Play game. - Look at the message - Listen& answer. - Copy down. - Have them raed the new words.. - Read. - This is the passage which was written base on the above message. Now you complete the passage by filling the most suitable words in the blank. - Asks Ss to complete the passage - Ask Ss to compare with a patner. - Asks some Ss to read the completed passage - Corrects. - Listen & prepare. * While - writing: - Gives each student a form then asks Ss to practice groups reading the passage then completing the form. - Asks some Ss to read the. Contents. 1. Read the massage. Then fill in the gaps in the passage that follows with the information. * New words - furniture (n) - delivery (n) - customer (n) - to be out - reach sb - midday - stationary (n) - order (n) * Complete the passage.. - Complete - Compare with a partner - Read aloud - Listen & take note - Practice in groups. - Read. 1. telephoned 2. May 12 3. speak 4. took. 5. Name 6. delivery 7. Mr .Ha 8. at. 2. Now read the passage below. Write the telephone massage in your exercise book..

(29) completed form - Corrects - Asks Ss to tell the form of - Tell a message.. - Asks Ss to read the dialogue and practice asking and answering questions: Who is this message for ? Who left this message ? Who took this message ? What did Tom call about? What time will Tom come? * Post - writing: - Asks ss to work in pairs & make up similar dialogue. - Give their dialogue to other pairs & write message. - Call on ss read up. - Corrects. Date: June 16th Time: after midday For : Mrs. Van Massage: Mr. Nam called about his stationary order. He wanted you to call him at 8 634 082 Taken by: Mr. Toan.. - Practice in pairs. - Work in pairs. 3. Practice. - Write message. A: Good afternoon. B: Good afternoon. Can I speak to Nancy, please. This is Lisa. A: I’m sorry my sister is out. Would you like to give her massege? B: Could you tell her that the time of the meeting has change. A:........ - Read - Listen and copy. Date of prepare: ...................................... Class 8A. Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Class 8B. Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Period 12. Unit 2. MAKING ARRANGEMENTS (Cont’) Language focus I. AIMS..

(30) 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson, students’ ll be able to review and practice “be going to” and adverb of place. - Vocabulary: fishing rods - Grammar: + be going to + adverbs of place. 2. Skills: - To practice doing exercises. 3. Attitude: -Like subject and more hardworking. II. TEACHING AIDS. 1. Teacher: Teacher’s book, plan. 2. Students: Student’s books, notebooks, pens. III. PROCEDURES. 1. Check the old lesson . - No check 2. New lesson: Introduce the new lesson. (1’) Teacher’ activities I. Warm up (4’) - Ask Ss some questions: How are you? What are you going to do this weekend ? Are you going to see a movie this evening?. Ss’ activities - Listen & answer the questions. II. Revision (10’) - Asks Ss to repeat the form - Retell and the use of be going to and adverbs of place. III. Practice (27’) - Asks Ss to do exercise 1: Say what the people are going to do. Ex: Nga has a movie ticket. => She’s going to see a. Contents. - Listen & prepare. 1. Grammar. * Be going to + V- infinitive: To talk about intentions Eg: I’m going to see a movie toninght. * Adverbs of places: - outside >< inside - upstairs >< downstairs - there , here, on, in..... - fishing rods: 2. Exercises Ex1: Say what the people are going to do..

(31) movie. - Call on ss to answer. - Corrects. - Introduces the form and asks Ss to do exercise 2 (p25) You complete “you,, column with (v) if you are going to do and (x) if you aren’t. - Aks ss to compare with a partner. - Call on ss to talk. - Controls and corrects. - Ask ss to add 3 more activities to the list. - Now work in pairs, ask your friend what he/ she is going to do by completing “your partner” column. - Call on ss to talk about their friends. - Asks Ss to look at the pictures (p26) &complete the speech using the verbs in the box once then do exercise 3. - Asks some pairs to practice - Controls and corrects. - Present before class - Listen & correct. a) They are going to go fishing b) She is going to read the new novel c) She is going to do her homework. d) He’s going to watch an action movie on T.V tonight. e) She is going to give him a birthday present. - Listen & Practice Ex 2: a, Add 3 more activities to the list.. - Compare - Practice (6 pairs) - Listen and take note. - Practice - Work in pairs. - Tell about their friends - Listen & do ex3. (a) S1 : Are you going to see a movie ? S2 : Yes, I am S1: Are you going to play sports? S2: Yes, I am ……………. (b) Your partner. She/ he is going to see a movie. She/ he is going to meet her friends. ............. Ex 3: Complete the speech. Use each adverb in the box once. - Work in pairs - Listen and write down. a) upstairs c) downstairs. b) here d) outside.

(32) e) there. f) inside. 3. Consolidation. (2') - T retell the contents of the lesson. 4. Homework.(1' ) - Make sentences - Read (Unit 3 - getting started, listen and read). ************************************ Date of prepare: .................................... Class 8A. Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Class 8B. Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Period 13. Unit 3. AT HOME Getting started - Listen and read I. AIMS. 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson, students’ ll be able to talk about the housework they often do at home. - Vocabulary: Cup board, steamer, sauce pan , frying pan..... - Grammar: Reflexive pronouns Modal verbs ( must, have to, ought to). 2. Skills - To practice discussing, listening and reading comprehension. 3. Attitude: - Like subject and more hardworking. II. TEACHING AIDS. 1. Teacher: Teacher’s book, plan, CD. 2. Students: Student’s books, notebooks, pens. III. PROCEDURES. 1. Check the old lesson . - No check 2. New lesson: Introduce the new lesson. (1’) Teacher’ activities I. Warm up (10’) - Asks Ss to look at the pictures (page 27) then ask some questions: - What is she doing? - Is she making the bed?. Ss’ activities - Look at & answer. Contents 1 . Getting started.

(33) - Do you havetocook meals? - Do you have to feed chicken? - Now you write the chores you have to do at home base on the pictures. - Explain some words - Call on Ss to answer - Controls and corrects II. Presentation (30’) - Introduces the situation : Mrs.Vui is busy. She’ll return home late. She asks Nam to help her with house work. Please guess what Nam have to do - Read modal & explain some words & grammar.. - Write down - Listen - Answer - Correct. a) washing the dishes /doing the washing-up b) making the bed c) Sweeping the floor d) cooking e) tidying up f) feeding the chicken. - Listen and guess. 2. Listen and read. - Listen & copy down. - Guide s to read the dialogue - Call on Ss to practice (2 pairs). - Listen & repeat. - Now you read the conversation again then you. - Read again then complete the list. - Practice reading in pairs. * New words - cup board (n) - steamer (n) - saucepan (n) - frying pan (n) * Grammar. (1) Reflexive pronouns I--> myself You--> yourself She--> herself He--> himself They--> themselves We--> ourselves Eg: You’ll have to cook dinner yourself I look at myself in the mirror every morning (2) Modal verbs: - Should/ ought to + V- infini => Advice Eg: You should/ ought to go to the dentist. -Must / have to + Vinfinitives => Obilgation Eg: I must/ have to tidy my room. *Complete the things Nam has to do..

(34) make a list of things that Nam has to do. - Call on ss answer - Corrects. - Answer - Copy. - (Nam has to) cook dinner. - (He has to) go to the market and buy fish and vegetables. - (He has to) call aunt Chi & ask her to meet his mother at grandma’s house.. 3. Consolidation. (3') - T retell the contents of the lesson. - Ss listen and remember. 4. Home work.(1') - Read and translate - Do exercises 1, 2(p20-21) inwork book - Read (Unit 3 - speak).. Date of prepare: ................................ Class 8A. Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Class 8B. Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Period 14. Unit 3. AT HOME (Cont’) Speak I. AIMS. 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson, students’ ll be able to practice talking about the place of things - Vocabulary: rug, arm chair, coffee table.... - Grammar: Let’s......./ I think we ought to........ ; Adverbs of place. 2. Skills: - Practice describe the places of furniture in the living room and the kitchen. 3. Attitude: - Love their country and other countries. II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher: Teacher’s book, plan 2. Students: Student’s books, notebooks, pens. III. PROCEDURES. 1. Check the old lesson . - No check 2. New lesson: Introduce the new lesson. (1’).

(35) Teacher’ activities I. Warm up (5’) - Guide Ss to play game “Networks” about names of things at home. - Correct. Ss’ activities - Play game. Contents bookshelf. - Listen. - Help Ss to revise adverds of position. * While - speaking: - Now you’re going to practice in pairs talk about the positions of each item. Eg: The fruit is in the bowl. - Call on some pairs read up - Correct and give answer.. * Post – speaking: - Ask Ss do Ex2 - Let’s match the words in. table. Home. television II. Presentation (21’) * While-speaking - Ask Ss to look at the pictures (p28) the tell names of objects in the picture - Explain some new words. chairs. armchair. - Look at and tell. 1. Look at the pic. Talk about the position of each item.. - Listen & copy down. * New words: - calendar (n) - counter (n) - knife (n) - dish rack (n) - above (pre) ≠ on (pre) - under (pre). - Revise position - Work in pairs. -Practice in pairs - Copy. - Do the task. - Listen & match. - The calendar is on the wall, under the clock and above the refrigerator. - The sink is next to the stove. - The cupboard is on the wall, above the counter. - The knives are on the wall, under the cupboard. - The bowl of fruit is between the rice cooker and the dish rack. - The clock is on the wall, above the refrigerator. ................. 2. Practice arrange the furniture..

(36) the box with objects - Explain some new words.. - Listen & copy down - Ask Ss to read words in the - Read box. - Ask Ss to practice in pairs - Practice in pairs Eg: S1: Let’s put the armchair opposite the couch. S2: Ok. And I think we ought to put the rug between the armchair and the couch. - Call on some ss practice - Practice - Correct and give answer - Copy down. * New words: - rug - arm chair - coffee table..... - I think the coffee table should be between the couch and the armchair. - Let’s put the magazines on the shelf above the books. - I think the shelf ought to be at one of the corners, opposite the couch. - Let’s put the telephone and the lamp on the small table next to the couch. - I think we should hang the picture/ the clock above the couch.. 3. Consolidation. (2') - T retell the contents of the lesson. 4. Homework.(1') - Describe one room in your house - Read and prepare (Unit 3 – Listen). WRITTEN TEST Time: 15 minutets I. Questions. Complete the second sentence so that it has a similar meaning to the first.(10pts) 1. Alexander Graham Bell invented telephone. Telephone was ………………………………………………………………………. 2. Let’s go to the movie tonight. How ………………………………………………………………………………… 3. Her hair is long and black. She has ………………………………………………………………………………. 4. I will telephone you tomorrow morning..

(37) I will ………………………………………………………………………………… 5. Remember to turn off the light before going out. Don’t ………………………………………………………………………………… II. Answer and points. Câu Complete the second sentence so that it has a similar meaning to the first.. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.. Đáp án Điểm Telephone was invented by Alexander Graham 2,0 Bell. How about going to the movies tonight ? 2,0 She has long black hair. 2,0 I will give you a ring tomorrow morning. 2,0 Don’t forget to turn off the light before going 2,0 out.. Date of prepare: ...................................... Class 8A. Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Class 8B. Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Period 15. Unit 3. AT HOME (Cont’) Listen I. AIMS. 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson, students’ ll be able to practice listening comprehension and choose the right item in the listening. - Vocabulary: fry, cut, pan, garlic..... - Grammar: 2. Skills - Practice listening to choose the right answer. 3. Attitude: - Love their country and other countries. II. TEACHING AIDS. 1. Teacher: Teacher’s book, plan, CD 2. Students: Student’s books, notebooks, pens III. PROCEDURES. 1. Check the old lesson. - No check. 2. New lesson: Introduce the new lesson. (1’) Teacher’ activities I. Warm up (4’) “Networks" - Explains how to do then. Ss’ activities. Contents refrigerator. - Listen and practice. ?.

(38) asks Ss to practice in groups - Controls and corrects.. - Listen. Kitchen. rice cooker saucepan II. Presentation (22’) * Pre - listening - Introduces the pictures (p30) and asks: Can you tell names the objects in the picture? - Explain some name of objects.. - Now you work in pairs and answer the question. +, What ingredients do you need to cook the “Special Chinese Fried Rice? - Call on S Ss to read ingredients * While - listening -We’re going to listen to a conversation between Mrs Tu & Lan about the necessary ingredients to cook the specail Chinese fried Rice. You listen and decide which are the necessary ingredients & utensils to cook this food by choosing the correct pictures in the book. - Read the conversation (3 times) - Asks some Ss to tell their. - Listen. 1.Vocabulary. - Listen and write. - rice(n) - noodle (n) - saucepan (n) - fryingpan (n) - garlic (n) - onion(n) - greenpaper (n) - peas (n) - ham (n). - Look at the pictures & answer. - Listen & copy - Listen to the teacher. 2. Look at the picture. Check the right items.. - Read aloud - Answer.

(39) answer. - Corrects - Turns on the tape again. - Listen - Listen to check then take note. a) Fried rice b) pan c) garlic and green pepper d) Ham and peas. * Post - listening: - Listen and practice - Asks Ss to practice in pairs asking and answering about how to cook Chinese fried rice. - How can Lan cook Chinese fried rice? - How much oil can she put on? - Does sheput the ham and the peas? - Listen carefully - Controls and corrects. 3. Consolidation. (2') - T retell the contents of the lesson. 4. Homework:(1') - Retell recipe of the special Chinese fried Rice. - Do exercise 3 (p22) in workbook. - Read and prepare " Unit 3 - read" ************************************************** Date of prepare: ................................. Class 8A. Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Class 8B. Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Period 16. Unit 3. AT HOME (Cont’) Read I. AIMS. 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson, students’ ll be able to know some safety precautions in the home. - Vocabulary: safety precaution, match, cause fire.... - Grammar: Modal verbs. 2. Skills - Practice reading ( true or false) 3. Attitude: - More hard working and like subject. II. TEACHING AIDS. 1. Teacher:.

(40) Teacher’s book, plan. 2. Students: Student’s books, notebooks, pens. III. PROCEDURES. 1. Check the old lesson.(5') - Do exercise 5 in workbook 2. New lesson: Introduce the new lesson. (1’) Teacher’ activities I. Warm up (4’) - Ask Ss some questions: Where do your parents put medicine? Do you often play with matches or knife ? …………. II. Presentation (32’) * Pre - reading - In our family, there are many different objects. Some of them may be dengerous to children if we don’t keep them carefully. - Let’s make the list of dengerous things and discuss. What must we do to keep children safe? - Introduces some new words. - Controls and asks Ss to practice by (slap the board). - Corrects. Introduces the structure. Ss’ activities. Contents. - Listen & answer. - Listen to the I. Read teacher - Write the list. - Answer 1. New words. - Listen & copy - drug (n) down - candy(n) - match (n) - injure (v) - Play game - cause (v) - cover (v) - kill (v) - precaution (n) - fire(n) - Corect & copy 2. Grammar. down (+) Modal verds: Must(not)/ have to +V - infi => Obligation Eg: You must cover electrical sockets. You must not let children play in the kitchen. (+) Why – Beacause..

(41) - To see if your guess is similar to the precautions in the book or not, you read text and decide whether the following statements are true or false. * While - reading - Read the text (twice) - Asks Ss to read - Asks Ss to read the text again and do exercise 1 - Asks some Ss to read their answer - Corrects. - Asks Ss to read the text again and do exercise 2 - Asks some Ss to read their answer. * Post - reading - Ask Ss to read the text aloud & translate. - Controls and corrects - Who is reading that poster? - Where do we often seethat poster? ……... - Look at & listen. - Read aloud(5Ss) - Listen and read silently & do ex1. - Practice reading ( 6 Ss) - Correct. =>Aks & answer about cause Eg: Why must we put all chemicals and drugs in locked cupboard? Beacause children often try to eat and drink them.. 3. Exercises Exercise 1: True or False. Correct the false sentences. a) F - It safe to keep medicine in the locked cupboard. b) - T c) F - A kitchen is not a suitable to play. d) F - Playing with a match can start a fire e) -T f) -T - Listen & read Exercise 2: Ask and answer. silently & do ex2 b) Because kitchen is a Read their dangerous place. answer c) Because one match can easily start a fire. d) Because children often try to put something into the, electric can kill. e) Because these things can injure or kill children. - Practice reading - Practice. 3. Consolidation. (2’) - T retell the contents of the lesson. - Ss listen and remember. 4. Homework:(1') - Read, answer questions - Do exercises 5, 6 (p24 -25) in work book. - Read and prepare (Unit 3 - Write).

(42) Date of prepare: .................................... Class 8A. Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Class 8B. Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Period 17. Unit 3. AT HOME (Cont’) Write I. AIMS. 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to practice writing a description of a room. - Vocabulary: lighting ficture, beneach dish rack. - Grammar: 2. Skills - Practice describing the places of the furniture in the living room or a in the kitchen. 3. Attitude: - Like subject and more hardworking. II. TEACHING AIDS. 1. Teacher: Teacher’s book, plan, second board. 2. Students: Student’s books, notebooks, pens. III. PROCEDURES. 1. Check the old lesson.(4') - Do exercise 5 in workbook 2. New lesson: Introduce the new lesson. (1’) Teacher’ activities Ss’ activities I. Warm up (5’) - Guide Ss to play game - Go to the board “Jumble words,, about and write objects at home. - Control and correct II. Presentation (32’) * Pre - writing - Ask Ss to look at the picture part 1 (p32) and introduce: “This is Hoa’s room. What objects do you see in her room? What do you think about their position?” - Ask Ss to read the text then underline the prepositions and new words. - Listen.. - Lookat & listen then answer. - Read silently & underline. Contents “Jumble words,, about objects at home. - acbodrup - cupboard - rcahmia - armchair - ansapuec - saucepan - lsobkohfe -bookshelf 1. Read the description of Hoa’s room..

(43) - Explain new words & prepositions - Asks Ss to read about Hoa’s bedroom & answer. What room is this ? What is there in Hoa’s bedroom? Where is the desk, the bookshelf, the wardrobe? - Ask Ss to look at & read the requirement of exercise 2 (p33) & explain some newwords. - Now base on the sample paragraph about Hoa’sroom and picture , you write a paragraph to describe the kitchen using the promts to make complete sentences. * While - writing - Asks Ss to practice writing individually. - Ask Ss to compare their writing with a partner - Asks some Ss to read the completed passage - Correct.. - Listen & copy down - Read aloud & answer the questions. * Newwords. - floder(n) - wardrobe(n) - above(pre) - beneach(pre) - on the lelf/ right side of - towel rack (n) - lighting fixture (n). - Look at & read. 2. Write a description of this kitchen.. - Listen & prepare. - Write individually - Compare with a partner - Read aloud their complete passage - Copy. * Post - writing - Asks Ss to write about one - Write about one of the room in their house. of the room in the house - Corrects - Listen & write. This is Hoa’s kitchen. There is a refrigerator in the right corner of the room. Next to the refrigerator is the stove and the oven. On the other side of the oven, there is a sink and next to the sink is a towel rack. The disk rack is on the counter beneath the window, there are jars of sugar, flour and tea. In the middle of the kitchen, there is a table and four chairs. The lighting fixture is above the table and directly beneath the lighting fixture is a vase with/ of flowers 3. Write a description of a room in your house. This is my …… There is / are …...

(44) ……………………. 3. Consolidation. (2’) - T retell the contents of the lesson. - Ss listen and remember. 4. Homework.(1') - Practice writing adescription of a room in your house. - Prepare "Unit 3 - Language focus.. *************************************************. Date of prepare: ....................................... Class 8A. Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Class 8B. Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Period 18. Unit3. AT HOME (Cont’) Language focus.

(45) I. AIMS. 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson,Ss will be able to give advice someone have to or ought to do something, say about result and reasons using "Why, because". - Vocabulary: - Grammar: Modal verbs Reflexive pronouns, Question “why”- Because 2. Skills: - Practice watching the pictures, completing the dialogue, asking and answering the questions. 3. Attitude: - Like subject and more hardworking. II. TEACHING AIDS. 1. Teacher: Teacher’s book, plan 2. Students: Student’s books, notebooks, pens. III. PROCEDURES. 1. Check the old lesson - No check. 2. New lesson: Introduce the new lesson. (1’) Teacher’ activities Ss’ activities I. Warm up (2’) - Ask Ss some questions. - Practice in groups How are you today? Do you have to tidy your room? Do you have to cook meal? Do you have to help your mom? II. Revision (9’) - Asks Ss to repeat the - Repeat. form and the use of the structures: + Modal verbs (Must, have to , ought to) Must expresses strong obligation. It’s personal Have to is imprersonal. It expresses a general obligation a law & a rule Ought to is an advise - Reflexive pronouns. - Write Before verb or preposition. Contents. I. Revision. (1) Modal verbs: - Must expresses strong obligation. It’s personal - Have to is imprersonal.It expresses a general obligationor a law & a rule - Ought to is used to give an advice (2) Reflexive pronouns. Before verb or preposition to emphasize.

(46) to emphasize for subject Eg: He can’t bath himself yet. - Question “why”- because => cause and reason. for subject Eg: He can’t bath himself yet. (3) Question “why”-because => cause and reason. III. Practice (30’) - Asks Ss to do exercise 1: - Practice Now you look at the pictures (p34) in the book and the verbs in the box, completing the dialogue by putting “have to” or “ must” in correct blank. - Call on Ss practice - Practice in groups completed dialogue in pairs - Corrects - Listen and copy - Asks Ss to do exercise 2 : Now you look at the pictures (p35) and give advice to the people in the pictures by using ‘ought to, Eg: I failed my English test. You ought to study harder. - Asks Ss to check their answer with a partner - Controls and corrects. - Listen and exercise. II. Exercises. Ex1. Complete the dialogue.. 1. have to / must do 2. must / have to clean 3. must / have to sweep 4. must/ have to clean 5. must/ have to empty 6. must/ have to Ex2: Give advice to these people. - Practice (6 pairs) - Write. - Asks Ss to do exercise 3: - Practice in pairs Now you work in pairs and complete the conversation by putting the reflexive pronoun in the right blank. - Asks some pairs to - Practice (6 pairs) practice - Controls and corrects - Write. b) You ought to get up earlier c) You ought to eat more fruit and vegetables d) You ought to go to the dentist Ex3: Complete the dialogues. Use the reflexive pronouns in the box. 1- ourselves 2- myself 3- yourself.

(47) 4- himself 5- herself 6- themselves 7- yourselves - Asks Ss to do exercise 4: - Listen and do Ex4: Ask and answer Ask and answer questions exercise about Hoa, Nam, Ha, Nga & Mrs Vui using WhyBecause Eg: Why did Hoa go to school late this morning? Because she watched T.V late last night. - Asks some pairs to - Practice in pairs b) Why did Nam have to cook practice himself? - Controls and corrects - Listen and copy - Because his mother was home down. late. c) Why was Mrs. Vui home late? - Because she went to her mother’s house. d) Why did Ha failed? - Because she played game last night e) Why didn’t Nga go to the movie? Because she had to clean the kitchen and sweep the floor. 3. Consolidation. (2’) - T retells the contents of the lesson. - Ss listen and remember. 4. Homework. (1') - Do the exercises again. - Prepare new lesson: Revision. *********************************** Date of prepare: ………………………….. Class 8A. Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Class 8B. Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Period 19. REVISION.

(48) I. AIMS. 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson, students’ll be able to review main grammars from unit 1 to unit 3. - Vocabulary: - Grammar: Simple tenses; (not) adjective + enough + to – infinitive; Describe people; Be going to; Adverbs of place; Modal verbs; Reflexive pronouns; Question “Why”- Because. 2. Skills: - To practice doing exercises. 3. Attitude: - Like subject and more hardworking. II. TEACHING AIDS. 1. Teacher: Teacher’s book, plan, second board. 2. Students: Student’s books, notebooks, pens. III. PROCEDURES. 1. Check the old lesson: - No check 2. New lesson: Introduce the new lesson. (1’) Teacher’ activities I. Warm up (4’) - Ask Ss some questions: What’s the weather like today? How are you today? What did you do yesterday? II. Revision (10’) - Ask Ss to revise the simple tenses and present simple to talk about general truths - Help Ss to revise the structure: (not) enough to - infinitive - Help Ss to revise the structure Be going to +V - infinitive to talk about intentions. - Help Ss to revise adverbs of places. - Ask Ss to retell reflexive. Ss’ activities - Answer questions. Contents. the. - Listen & revise. I. Revision * Tenses: + Present simple : S + V-s/ es + Present progressive: Be + V- ing - Revise & copy + Past simple : S + V- ed down *(not) adjective + enough + to -ifinitive - Revise & copy * Be going to + V - infinitive: To down talk about intentions Eg: I’m going to see a movie to ninght. - Revise and copy * Adverbs of places: down - outside >< inside - upstairs >< downstairs - there, here, on, in..... - Retell and copy * Reflexive pronouns.

(49) pronouns. down. - Ask Ss to retell modals and their using.. - Retell and copy down. III. Practice (27’) - Give some exercises and ask Ss to do. Then call them read aloud their answers. Check up and correct if there is any mistake. - Call some Ss give their answers. - Corects.. - Asks some Ss go to the board and write the answer. - Corrects.. I => myself You => yourself She => herself He => himself They => themselves We => ourselves Eg: You’ll have to cook dinner yourself I look at myself in the mirror every morning * Modal verds: Must (not)/ have to + V - infi => Obligation Eg: You must cover electrical sockets.. - Listen and do as II. Practice. the teacher Ex1: Put the verbs in brackets requested. into the correct form. 1.The sun always (rise)..........in the east. Look, it (rise)...........! 2. I don’t think I (go)..............out toningt. I’m too tired. - Give the answer 3. Where you (spend)..............your summer holiday last year, Tam? - Copy down. Answer: 1. rises, is rising 2. will go 3. did spend Ex2: Combine each of the following pairs of sentences into one sentence, using (not) adjective + enough. 1. It’s not warm.We can’t go swimming. 2. The fire isn’t very hot. It won’t - Write boil a kettle. 3. He is strong. He can carry that suitcase. - Take note Ansswer: 1. It’s not warm enough for us to go swimming 2. The fire isn’t hot enough to boil a kettle 3. He is strong enough to carry that suitcase.

(50) - Call on Ss read their - Read answer. - Corects and give the key. - Write.. - Asks Ss write their answer on the board. - Checks and corrects. - Call some Ss write their answer. - Corrects.. - Go to the board and write the answer. - Take note. - Do the task. - Write. 3. Consolidation. (2’) - T retells the contents of the lesson. - Ss listen and remember. 4. Homework. (1') - Do the exercises again. - Prepare for the written test.. Ex3: Complete the following sentences, using reflexive pronouns. 1. He was very surprise when he looked at....................in the mirror. 2. Phuong had a great holiday. She enjoyed........................ 3. Don’t worry about Linh and me. We can look after............... Answer: 1. himself 2. herself 3. ourselves Ex 4: Complete the sentences. Use "must" or "have to" and the verbs in the box. learn cook wash work 1. They will be home from school soon. I.....................their lunch. 2. Mr. Lam....................late at the office last night. 3. I ...............my clother today. Answer: 1. must/ have to cook 2. must/ have to work 3. must/ have to wash Ex5: Give advice to your friends. Use "ought to" or "ought not to" 1. He often goes to school late. 2.Your friend begins smoking. Advise him to stop smoking. 3.Your friend often get bad mark. Advise her to stydy harder. Answer: 1. He ought to get up early 2. You ought not to smoke 3. You should study harder..

(51) ************************************ Date of prepare: …………………………. Class 8A. Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Class 8B. Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Period 20. THE WRITTEN TEST (No1) Time: 45 minutes I. AIMS. 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to do the test, know the level of students. 2. Skills: Practice listening, reading, writing and language focus. 3. Attitude: - Like subject and more hardworking. II. TEACHING AIDS. 1. Teacher: Photo tests. 2. Students:Schoolthings. III. Procedures: 1. Matrix: Cấp độ Tên Chủ đề. Nhận biết TN. TL. Thông hiểu TN. TL. I. Listening. Fill in the gaps. Số câu Số điểm Tỉ lệ % II. Reading. 5câu 0,5 đ. Số câu Số điểm Tỉ lệ % III. Language focus Số câu Số điểm Tỉ lệ % IV. Writing Số câu Số điểm Tỉ lệ %. Vận dụng Cấp độ thấp Cấp độ cao TN. TL. TN. Cộng. TL. 5 câu 2,5đ =25%. Answer questions 5câu 0,5 đ. 5 câu 2,5 đ =25%. Circle the best option 4 câu 0,5 đ. 4 câu 2,0 đ =20% Order the words. 3 câu 1,0đ. 3 câu 3,0 đ =30%.

(52) Tổng số câu Tổng số điểm Tỉ lệ %. 4 câu 2,0 điểm 20%. 10 câu. 3 câu. 5,0 điểm 50%. 3,0 điểm 30%. 17 câu 10 điểm 100%. 2. Questions I. Listening. Listen to the passage and fill in the gaps. ( 2,5 pts). Nam(1)………tall and slim. He is a young man in his early twenties (2) ……….short hair and a fair complexion. He (3)………..a round face and appears cheerful by nature. It is easy to recognize him (4)…………..he is usually dressed in jeans and T-shirt and (5)……….boots. II. Reading. Read the paragraph and answer the questions (2,5 pts): Nga likes travelling. In summer vacations, she and her family often travel to Nha Trang. They stay there for five days. They usually visit the beach and swim. Nga enjoys swimming very much. They usually stay in a small guest-house by the sea, but sometimes they stay in a hotel. Last summer, they went to Vung Tau.They stayed at Sunshine Hotel for three days. In the afternoon, her father, Mr. Anh play tennis with his friends. Nga and her mother walked along the beach and built sandcastles. They visited Tri Nguyen Aquarium and saw many different kinds of fish there. They bought a lot of souvenirs for friends. * Answer the questions: 1. Do they sometimes stay in a hotel? ........................................................................................................................................ 2. Where did they go last summer vacation? ........................................................................................................................................ 3. What did they see at Tri Nguyen Aquarium? ........................................................................................................................................ 4. What did they buy? ........................................................................................................................................ 5. Where did Nga stay in Nha Trang? ........................................................................................................................................ III. Language focus : Circle the best option A, B, C or D. (2,0pts) 1. Are you looking for Ba? I think he .................hide and seek with his friends in the garden now. A. play B. is playing C. plays D. to play 2. Peter doesn’t talk much in public. He’s rather ........................ A. reserved B. kind C. sociable D. humorous 3. There is a bookself ........................the left of the room. A. at B. in C. of D. on 4. Hoa studies............................. Because she often gets good grades. A. good B. bad C. well D. badly.

(53) IV. Writing Rerrange the words to make meaningful sentence.(3,0pts) 1. with / doesn’t / Make / that / child / play / sure / your / matches. 2. let / the / children / Don’t / play / in / your / bathroom. 3. the / We / ourselves / party / enjoyed / at.. 3. Answer and points. Câu. I. Listening. II. Reading. III. Language focus. IV. Writing. Đáp án 1. is 2. with 3. has 4. because 5. wears Tapescript: Nam is tall and slim. He is a young man in his early twenties with short hair and a fair complexion. He has a round face and appears cheerful by nature. It is easy to recognize him because he is usually dressed in jeans and T-shirt and wears boots. 1. Yes, they do. 2. They went to Nha Trang. 3. They saw many different kinds of fish there. 4. They bought a lot of souvenirs for friends. 5. She stayed at Sunshine Hotel 1. B 2. A 3. D 4. C 1. Make sure that your child doesn’t play with matches. 2. Don’t let your children play in the bathroom. 3. We enjoiyed ourselves at the party.. Điểm 0,5 0,5 0,5 0,5 0,5. 0,5 0,5 0,5 0,5 0,5 0,5 0,5 0,5 0,5 1,0 1,0 1,0.

(54) Date of prepare: …………………….. Class 8A. Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Class 8B. Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Period 21. Unit 4: OUR PAST Getting started – Listen and read. I. AIMS. 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson, students will be able to talk about the furniture and Viet Namese’s life one hundred years ago. - Vocabulary: - Equipment, light-lit, folktale, great-grandma, once... - Grammar: - Past simple - Used to, had to - What + be + S + like? 2. Skills: - Talk about the way things used to be and the way they are now. 3. Attitude: - They know about people, culture. Then they love their country. II.TEACHING AIDS. 1. Teacher: Text book, plan, cassette, CD and picture. 2. Students: Text books, notebooks, pens. III. PROCEDURES. 1. Check the old lesson: - No check 2. New lesson: Introduce the new lesson. (1’) Teacher’ activities I. Warm up (10’) - Asks: Do you watch T.V? Did people watch T.V 100 years ago? - By looking at the title “Viet Nam100 years ago, can you guess our top pic in this lesson. - Asks Ss to work in groups, look. Ss’ activities. Contents. - Answer. - Look at the picture and guess. I. Getting started * Answers: 1. The T.V.

(55) at the pictures (page 38). Then name 5 things that don’t belong to the past in Vietnam 100 years ago. - Controls and corrects then asks II. Presentation (30’) - Asks Ss to look at the picture and introduce: We are going to listen to a dialogue between Nga and her grandma about the things that Nga’s grandma used to do when she was a young girl. You listen to the tape and write the names of the things she had to do. - Read the dialogue (twice) - Call on ss to tell the list of the things she had to do - Explain some new words.. - Listen and practice in groups - Correct - Look at & listen. 2. The radio 3. The mobile phone 4. The lighting fixture 5. Modern clothes / School uniform. II. Listen and read.. - Listen & write name of the things - Answer - Listen & copy down. * Newwords. - Great - grandma (n)>< great grandfather (n) - Equipment (n) - To express the things Nga’s - Answer - Light - lit (v) grandma had to do what structure - Folktale/ traditional stories: does she use. You underline them - Once (adv) - Explain grammar. - Copy down * Grammar. (1) Used to + V- infinitive => Habit in the past Ex: I used to live on the farm (2) What + be + S + like? => Nhu the nao....? Exs: What was life like then? (3) Had to + V - infi => Obligation in the past Ex: I had to stay at home - Asks some pairs to practice - Listen and 1. Practice the dialogue with reading. practice reading a partner - Correct their pronunciation then - Read again 2. Work with a parner. Ask asks ss to read again and answer and answer and nswer the questions. the questions. - Asks some pairs to practice - Work inpairs - Correct - Correct& copy a) She used to live on a farm down b) Because she had to stay at home and help her mom.

(56) - Explains about “fact” and “opinion” Ex: Fact: I learn English Opinion: English is verydifficult - Asks some Ss to read their answer - Corrects. - Listen and practice doing exercise 3. c) She used to cook meals, clean the house and wash the clothes d) Her great grandmother used to lit the lamp and her great grandfather used to tell them stories. e) She asked her grandmother to tell her the tale “The lost shoe” 3. Fact or opinion Ex: Fact: I learn English Opinion: English is very difficult. - Read - Copy down. a- fact c- fact e- opinion. b- fact d- fact f- opinion. 3. Consolidation. (3’) - T retells the contents of the lesson. - Ss listen and remember. 4. Home work. (1') - Read and translate - Do exercises 1, 2 (p27) in workbook. - Make sentences with “used to” - Read (Unit 4: Speak + Listen). *********************************************** Date of prepare: ……………………………… Class 8A. Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Class 8B. Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Period 22. Unit 4: OUR PAST (Cont’) Speak – Listen I. AIMS. 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson, students’ll be able to practice talking about the difference between life in the past and in present, use “used to”. Listen to the story and write the letter of the most suitable moral lesson. - Vocabulary: Lay, lay eggs, in amazement, excitedly, foolish, greedy, moral lesson, - Grammar: Revision - past simple 2. Skills:.

(57) - To develop speaking, listening skills. 3. Attitude: - They know about people, culture. Then they love their country. II.TEACHING AIDS. 1. Teacher: Text book, plan, cassette, CD. Teacher’ activities I. Warm up (4’) - Ask ss some questions. What sports or games did you use to play when you were younger? Did you use to cry a lot when you were a small child? Did you use to get up late? Didyou use to go to bed early? II. Presentation (30’) * Pre - speaking. - Introduces the picture (p40) and asks What are the two pictures about ? - Picture1 is about the past/ the countryside … - Picture 2 is about the modern life/ the city … - Device class into 2 groups. Each group discusses a picture - Asks some Ss to practice talking about the differences between two pictures - Corrects.. Ss’ activities Listen and answer questions. - Look at the picture and practice. - Work in groups - Present. - Copy down * While - speaking: - Now you work in pairs, looking at the pictures and the words listed, talk about differences betwwen life in the past & now by using ‘used to, - Ask ss to dicuss in pairs - Asks some pairs to present. Contents. -Listen and practice.. - Discuss. I. Speak. 1. Talk about the way things used to be and the way they are now. Picture 1 - Small house - Walking - Stack of straw - Working on the field ........... Picture 2 - Big house & buildings - Car - Shops - T.V - Going to school - Traffic lights - Electricity. - People used to live in small houses. Now they live in big houses and buildings - People used to walk. Now they travel by cars, motorbikes … - There didn’t use to be electricity. Now there are.

(58) before class - Corrects and suggestions answer. - Practice in pairs (5 pairs) - Correct. * Post - speaking: - Asks some pairs to practice telling about what they used - Practice in pairs to do last year - Asks some pairs to practice - Controls and corrects. - Practice in pairs (5 pairs) * Pre - listening: - Listen and - We are going to listen to answer. one of stories, you listen it and decide which of the - Listen to the following is the most teacher suitable moral lesson. - Introduces some new words - Listen & copy down.. electricity everywhere - People used to work hard on the fields. Now, they have a lot of time for watching T.V.... - Children used to stay home. Now they go to school.... * Suggestion; - Last year I used to get bad marks. Now I get good marks. - Last year I walked to school. Now I go to school by bike. ………… II. Listen. - Lay (v) - lay eggs - In amazement - Excitedly (adv) - Foolish (adj) - Greedy (adj) - Moral lesson (n). - Asks Ss to read 4 sentences It’s about chicken in the book and try to guess It’s about gold something about the folktale ……… * While - listening: - Turns on the tape (3 times). - Listen. - Turns on the tape again and - Listen & find out asks some ss to find out information information about : + The chickens + The husband + The wife - Corrects - Asks Ss to read the four sentences and find out the. - Correct - Read & answer. - It’s about chickens with gold eggs - It’s about a farmer and his wife. - It’s about greedy people …. * The moral lesson.

(59) moral lesson - Turns on the tape again - Give correct answer. * Post - listening: - Asks Ss to tell the story base on information in the table - Controls and corrects. b) Don’t be foolish and greedy - Listen & check the answer - Copy down. * Practice chicken - Laid many eggs - Laid a gold eggs - Were dead. - Tell story. Husband - Collect & sold eggs -Discovered a gold eggs - Kill all the kichens - Foolish. - Correct. Date of prepare:………………………. Class 8A. Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Class 8B. Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Period 23. Unit 4: OUR PAST (Cont’) Read I. AIMS. 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson, students’ll be able to read a folktale “The Lost Shoe,, and answer the questions. Complete the sentences. - Vocabulary: Die, cruel, upset, prince, rags, drop, fall in love, broken heart.....

(60) - Grammar: Past simple (Revision) 2. Skills: - To develop reading comprehension, asking and aswering the questions, Completing the sentences. 3. Attitude: - They know about people, culture. Then they love their country. II.TEACHING AIDS. 1. Teacher: Text book, plan. 2. Students: Text books, notebooks, pens. 1. Check the old lesson. (4') - Go to the board and tell the things you used to do last year. 2. New lesson: Introduce the new lesson. (1’) Teacher’ activities Ss’ activities I. Warm up (2’) - Ask ss some questions: What is the weather like - Listen and today? answer. How are you today? Who is absent today? What is the date today? II. Presentation (35’) *Pre – reading: Do you like folktales? Which stories do you like the most? Why? What are those stories usually about? Can you tell me the name of some stories that you remmember? Do you know this story? What can you guess from the tittle? * While - reading: - Ask ss to read scan the story and find information about 3 people: + Little Pea + Stout Nut + Stepmother - Explain some new words and grammar. Then guide to. Contents. - Listen and answer. - Listen and read silently to find information about 3 people. - Listen & copy 1. New words. down. Then - Die (v):.

(61) read.. read.. - Ask ss to read the story again - Practice then complete the sentences with words from the story. - Call on ss answer and - Read and correct. write.. - Asks Ss to read the text again and do exercise 2. - Asks some Ss to read their answer - Corrects. Introduces the structure * Post - reading: - Ask Ss some questions: Do you like the story? Who do you like / hate? Why? Is this a true story? How do you know? What is the moral lesson from the story? - Controls and corrects - Sumary the story. - Read again - Read - Copy down - Listen and answer. - Listen and copy - Listen. 3. Consolidation. (2’) - T retells the contents of the lesson. - Ss listen and remember.. - Cruel (adj): - Upset (adj): - Prince (n): - Rags (n): - Drop (v): - Broken heart (n): - Fairy (n) - Fall in love: - Change sth in to sth: - Marry (v): 2. Grammar. Past simple tense. Eg: His wife died, the farmer married again. His new wife had a daughter 3. Exercise Ex1: Complete the sentences a) …a farmer b) …died … c) …used …again d) … marry … e) … new clothes … f) … lost … Ex2: Answer key: a) She was a poor farmer’s daughter b) She made Little Pea do the chores all day. c) Before the festival started, a fairy appeared and magically changed her rags into beautiful clothes. d) The prince decided to marry the girl who fitted the lost shoe. e) This is not a true story because there is a fairy..

(62) 4. Homework: (1') - Read, answer questions. - Retell the story. - Read and prepare (Unit 4 - Write). *************************************************** Date of prepare:……………………. Class 8A. Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Class 8B. Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Period 24. Unit 4: OUR PAST (Cont’) Write I. AIMS. 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson, students’ll be able to practice complete a folktale use the verbs in the box. Write a short story. - Vocabulary: - Graze, servant, master, wisdom, straw, lit, black strips.... - Grammar: - Past simple (Revision) 2. Skills: - To develop writing, completing the story use the verbs in the box. 3. Attitude: - They know about people, culture. Then they love their country. II.TEACHING AIDS. 1. Teacher: Text book, plan. 2. Students: Text books, notebooks, pens. III. PROCEDURES. 1. Check the old lesson.(4') - A student reread the passage. 2. New lesson: Introduce the new lesson. (1’) Teacher’ activities Ss’ activities I. Warm up (2’) - Ask ss some questions: What is the weather like - Listen and today? answer. How are you today? Who is absent today? What is the date today? II. Presentation (35’) * Pre - writing: - Ask ss some questions:. - Listen and answer. Contents.

(63) Do you know the folktale “This is my wisdom” (TrÝ kh«n cña ta ®©y). Who are three characters in the story? Where did they meet? What was the buffalo doing? Why tigers have black tripes? … - In this lesson, we will learn more about this story. - Introduces some new words. - Let’s complete the story by filling the verbs inthe correct blank. - Ask ss to compare with a partner - Asks some ss to read the completed story - Corrects. * While – writing: - Now imagine you are the farmer rewrite the story using the words given. Bigin like this: One day I was in the field and...... - Ask ss to change their writing with other to correct mistakes - Asks Ss to read their writing. - Corrects. - Pay attention - Copy down. - Read & complete the story. - Compare with apartner - Read aloud. 1. New words. - Servant > < master - Straw (n): - To escape: - To graze: - Wisdom (n): - Rope (n): - Stripe (n): - To tie: - To escape > < appear 2. Practice. Ex1: Complete the story.. - Correct. 1) appeared 3) said 5) went 7) lit 9) escaped. 2) was 4) left 6) tied 8) burned. - Listen & write. Ex2: Write the story.. - Compera with a partner - Read their writings - Correct. One day as I was in the field and my buffalo was grazing nearby, a.

(64) tiger came. It asked me why the strong buffalo was my servant and why I was its master. I told the tiger that I had something called wisdom. The tiger wanted to see it, but I told it I left the wisdom at home that day. Then I tied the tiger to the tree with a rope because I didn’t wanted it to eat my buffalo. I went to get some straw and I burned the tiger. The tiger escaped but today It still has black stripes from the burns. “One day, as a farmer was in his field and I was grazing nearby …….” * Post - writing: - Asks Ss to imagine they are the tiger or the buffalo the retell the story. Who was the master? Why did the tiger have black stripes? What is the moral lesson? - Corrects. - Imagine & retell. - Listen. 3. Consolidation. (2’) - T retells the contents of the lesson. - Ss listen and remember. 4. Homework. (1') - Practice writing. - Do exercise 7 (p31) in workbook. - Read "Unit 4 - Language focus"..

(65)

(66) Date of prepare: …………………….. Class 8A. Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Class 8B. Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Period 25. Unit 4: OUR PAST (Cont’) Language focus I. AIMS. 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson, students’ll be able to review and practice past simple tense, used to, prepositions. - Vocabulary: - Grammar: Past simple, used to, prepositions. 2. Skills: - To practice doing exercise. 3. Attitude: - They know about people, culture. Then they love their country. II.Teaching aids: 1. Teacher: Text book, plan. 2. Students: Text books, notebooks, pens. III. PROCEDURES. 1. Check the old lesson. (4') - Retell the story “How the tiger get his stripe” 2. New lesson: Introduce the new lesson. (1’) Teacher’ activities I. Warm up (2’) - Ask ss some questions: Did you prepare the old lesson? Did you watch t.v last night? How do you feel today?. Ss’ activities - Listen and answer.. Contents.

(67) II. Revision (10’) - Asks ss to repeat the form and the use of the past simple. What tense do you use if you want to talk about events have happened? - Ask ss to repeat: Used to infi.... What did you do when you were a little boy? What structure do you use when you talk about a habit in past. - Reveiw the prepositions of time. III. Practice (25’) - Asks Ss to do exercise 1: - Asks Ss to go to the board & write - Corrects. - Asks Ss to do exercise 2 - Asks Ss to practice inpairs - Controls and corrects. - Repeat. - Answer - Repeat. - Answer. - Listen & copy down. - Repeat - Answer. I. Revision. (1). The past simple tense. - Use: To talk about events happened in past (last week/ month/ year,…) - Form: (+) S + V- ed - irregular (-) + didn’t + V-infi... (?) Did + S + V-infi...? Yes, S + did / No, S + did not (2). Used to + V-infi... : to talk about a habit in past. - Form: (+) S + used to + V (-) S + didn’t used to -infi... (3). Prepositions of time. - in + year (in 1997) month (in June) - on + date (on 17th) + date, month, year (on June 2rd 2008) + day (on Monday) - at + time (at 7.00). II. Exercises. Ex1: Write the past form of each verbs - Listen & Eg: run - ran copy down b) fly - flew c) take - took d) go - went e) have - had f) do - did g) be - was/ were h) ride - rode i)e at - ate j) sit - sat k) come – came - Practice Ex2: Complete the dialogue. - Go to the a) Did you have rice for breakfast? board & write b) I walked to school - Copy down c) Where were you yesterday?.

(68) d) We had Math, Literature, English and History.. - Asks ss to do exercise 3 - Do complete the sentences use the exsercise. prepositoins in the table. - Asks some ss to practice - Practice in pairs - Controls and corrects - Copy down - Asks Ss to do exercise 4 - Asks some pairs to practice - Controls and corrects. - Practice - Practice - Copy down. Ex3: Complete sentences.. a) on b) in c) between d) at/ after e) before Ex 4: Complete the dialogue. 1) I used to have long hair 2) She used to be my next boor neighbor 3) They used to live in Hue. 3. Consolidation. (2’) - T retells the contents of the lesson. - Ss listen and remember. 4. Homework. (1') - Do the exercises again - Make sentences. - Prepare next lesson “Correct the test” **************************************************** Date of prepare: ……………………… Class 8A. Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Class 8B. Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Period 26. CORRECT THE TEST (No1) I. AIMS. 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson, Ss will be to correct the mistakes in their tests. - Vocabulary: Contents of test - Grammar: Contents of test 2. Skills: - Practice doing exercises 3. Attitude: - Like subject and more consciousness in learning English..

(69) II.TEACHING AIDS. 1. Teacher: Text book, plan. 2. Students: Text books, notebooks, pens. III. PROCEDURES. 1. Check the old lesson. - No check 2. New lesson: Introduce the new lesson. (1’) Teacher’ activities I.Warm up (4’) - Ask ss some questions. How are you today? Are you worried about your test? Is good or bad? II. Presentation (37’) - Remark the written test + Total: + Good: + Fair: + Poor: - Pay & correct the test. I. Listen - Read the listening again to ss check the answer. Ss’ activities. Contents. - Listen and answer.. - Listen to the teacher. - Look at the test & correct mistakes.. 1. Remark the test + Total: + Good: + Fair: + Poor: 2. Correct the test.. - Listen and check the answer. I. Listen: Listen to the passage and give short answers to the following questions:(2,5 points):. - Write. II. Reading. - Ask ss to read the text and answer again.. 1. is 2. with 3. has 4. because 5. wears. - Read again. - Correct mistakes. - Correct. II. Read: Read the paragraph and answer the questions (3,0 points): 1. Yes, they do. 2. They went to Nha Trang. 3. They saw many different kinds of fish there.. - Give correct answer and mark. 4. They bought a lot of souvenirs for friends..

(70) 5. She stayed at Sunshine Hotel III. Language focus. - Explain each sentences and say reason choosing.. - Listen and correct. - Give correct answer - Write IV. Writing - Guide ss to write sentences about themselves. - Rewrite. - Give correct answer - Listen.. III. Language focus : Choose the best answer (2,0 point). 1. D 2. C 3. B 4. A IV. Write: Rerrange the words to make meaningful sentence.(3,0points) 1. Make sure that your child doesn’t play with matches. 2. Don’t let your children play in the bathroom. 3. We enjoiyed ourselves at the party.. 3.Consolidation (3’) - T retells the main content of lesson - Listen carefully. 4. Homework (1’) - Prepare for the next lesson. Unit 5: Getting started – Listen and read. Date of prepare: ……………………………… Class 8A. Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Class 8B. Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Period 27. Unit 5: STUDY HABITS.

(71) Getting started – Listen and read I. AIMS. 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson, students’ will be able to retell of other's talked. Give commands requests and advice in reported speech. - Vocabulary: - Report card, pronunciation, semester, improve, to be pround of.... - Grammar: - Request and advice in reported speech. 2. Skills: - Practice asking and answering about subjects, listening to the dialogue and complete the report card. 3. Attitude: - They know about people, culture. Then they love their country. II.TEACHING AIDS. 1. Teacher: Text book, plan, cassette, tape. 2. Students: Text books, notebooks, pens. III. PROCEDURES. 1. Check the old lesson: - No check. 2. New lesson: Introduce the new lesson. (1’) Teacher’ activities I. Warm up (2’) - Ask ss some questions: Did you prepare the new lesson? Did you watch t.v last night? How do you feel today? II. Presentation (30’) - Ask ss to practice about their lesson schedule. Eg: S1: How often do we have English? S2: We have English three times a week ………………………. - Asks ss to practice in pairs - Controls and corrects - Asks ss to look at the picture and guess Who are they?. Ss’ activities Listen answer. Contents. and. - Practice in pairs.. I. Getting started - How often do we have English? We have English three times a week. - Do as requested - Look at the picture - Listen and guess. II. Listen and read.

(72) Is Tim a good student? What are they talking about? - Read the dialogue. to answer. - Ask ss to find out new words.. * New words. - report card(n): - to be proud of: - semester (n): - Listen and - improve (v): practice reading - Spanish pronunciation (n): - try one’s best: 1. Practice the dialogue with a - Practice ( 4 pairs) partner.. - Guide ss to read new words. - Aks some pairs to practice reading.(Correct their pronounciation) - Explain new stuctures. Miss Jackson said you should work harder on your Spanish pronunciation. => Advice in reported speech. She asked me to give you this dictionary. => Request in reported speech. - Listen and check their guessing - Find out. - Listen and copy down. - Asks Ss to read again and - Read and do ex2 check the boxes true or false. - Asks ss to answer. - Answer - Correct - Copy down. - Asks Ss to read again and - Read and do ex3 answer questions Ex3. - Practice in pairs - Asks some pairs to practice - Correct and give answers - Correct (on the sub board). * Grammar. - Miss Jackson said you should work harder on your Spanish pronunciation. => Advice in reported speech. S + said + O + should + V... Eg: The doctor said you should eat alot of vegetables - She asked me to give you this dictionary. => Request in reported speech S + asked + O + to + V..... Eg: Lan asked me to wait her in front of the theater. 2. True or false? Check (v) the boxes a) Jim was in the living room b) T c) F. It is a good report d) T e) F. He needs to improve Spanish pronunciation f) T 3. Answer the questions. a) Miss Jackson is Jim’s teacher. b) Miss Jackson gave his mother his report card c) Jim studied very well this semester d) Miss Jackson said Tim.

(73) should work harder on his Spanish pronounciation e) She gave him a dictionary III. Practice ( 9’) - Have ss to disscuss about their school report card last semester Was your school report card last semester good? What were you good at /bad at? What do you need to improve? - Call on some ss present before class. - Correct. - Discuss in groups. - Present before class - Correct. 3. Consolidation. (2’) - T retells the contents of the lesson. - Ss listen and remember. 4. Home work: (1') - Read and translate - Do exercises 1, 2 - Read (Unit 5: Speak + Listen).. Date of prepare: ……………………………. Class 8A. Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Class 8B. Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Period 28. Unit 5: STUDY HABITS (Cont’) Speak - Listen I. AIMS. 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson, students will be able to practice talking about the schedule in a week and about students’ study. - Vocabulary: Days present, behavior, comment, co-operation... - Grammar: Question words.

(74) Report speech. 2. Skills: -To practice listening comprehension: Personal information and study result. - To develop speaking, listening skills. 3. Attitude: - They know about people, culture. Then they love their country. II.TEACHING AIDS. 1. Teacher: Text book, plan, cassette, tape. 2. Students: Text books, notebooks, pens. III. PROCEDURES. 1. Check the old lesson: (4') - A student to do exercise 1 in workbook. 2. New lesson: Introduce the new lesson. (1’) Teacher’ activities I. Warm up (5’) - Let’s ss play game:“Jumble words” - Explains and asks ss to practice - Control and correct II. Presentation (32’) 1. Speak * Pre - speaking. - Introduces the questions - Ask ss to look at the questions and practice answer about themselves.. - Explain some structures - Practice model with a student. When do you do your homework? Who help you with your homework? Which subjects do you need to. Ss’ activities - Play game - Listen practice - Listen. Contents. Jumble words: ahtm - Math and itrsoyh - History ogarpehyg - Geography hcmetsryi - Chemistry olibgoy - Biology. - Look at & listen I. Speak. - Listen and Spend (time) on …. practice Help somebody with …. S1: When do you do your homework? S2: I do my homework after school. What about you? S1: I do it late at night. Who help you with your homework? S2: My father. How about you? - Copy down S1: My brother … - Parctice with T Ex : “I do my homework S1: I do my after school,, Nam said homework after => Nam said he did his school. homework after school + My father …. ........

(75) improve?.... * While - speaking: - Explains how to do then asks Ss - Listen to practice in pairs &practice - Asks some pairs to practice - Practice in pairs (5 pairs) - Corrects - Listen & remember - Help ss to retell form of report - Listen speech. Eg : “I do myhomework after school,, Nam said -> Nam said he did his homework after school. * Post - speaking: - Asks ss to report what they said. - Report - Practice. - Practice - Controls and corrects. - Correct 2. Listening: * Pre - listening. - Ask ss to look at the report card - Look at the card II. Listen (p 48) & answer What’s this? How many words do you know? - Introduces some new words - Listen & copy a. New words down - comment (n): - co-operation (n): - Ask ss to listen and practice - Listen & repeat - day present (n): - day absent (n): - behavior-participation(n): - Introduces the report card and - Guess and -(Un)satisfactory (adj): asks ss to guess to complete the complete - making period (n): blank * While - listening: - Read the listening - Listen and check their guessing. - Read the listening again and - Listen & b. Listen to the dialogue asks some ss to find out complete and complete the report information to complete the card. report card - Have ss to compare their answer - Compare with a partner - Call on ss to answer - Answer - Corrects - Read again & ask ss to check - Listen and (1) Day: present 87.

(76) their answers. check.. * Post - listening: - Asks Ss to practice in pairs to ask and answer about Sarah Chen, using her report card - Practice - Controls and corrects.. (2) Day absent: 5 (3) Participation: S (4) Listening: C (5) Speaking: A (6) Reading: A (7) Writin : B. - Work in pairs - Practice - Correct. 3. Consolidation. (2’) - T retells the contents of the lesson. - Ss listen and remember. 4. Homework: (1') - Make conversation. - Do exercises 3, 4 (p33 - 34) in workbook. - Read and prepare (Unit 5: Read).. Date of prepare: …………………………………… Class 8A. Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Class 8B. Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Period 29 + 30. Unit 5: STUDY HABITS (Cont’) Read I. AIMS. 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson, students’ll be able to read a text about knowing how to study vocabulary and answer the questions. - Vocabulary: Mother tongue, learn by heart, come across, underline, highlight, revision... - Grammar: Should 2. Skills: - To develop reading comprehension. - Reading skill 3. Attitude: - They know about people, culture. Then they love their country. II.TEACHING AIDS. 1. Teacher: Text book, plan. 2. Students: Text books, notebooks, pens. III. PROCEDURES..

(77) 1. Check the old lesson.(4') - A student do exercise 3 in workbook. 2. New lesson: Introduce the new lesson. (1’) Teacher’ activities I. Warm up (5’) - Ask ss some questions. What’s your favorite subject? What subject are you good at? What do you do to improve your English? II. Presentation (35’) * Pre – reading - Ask ss to look at the picture and have guess of our today lesson. - Write any new words on the board & aks ss Do you know these words? How do you remember that word? - Introduce lesson: How to learn vocabulary. Do you like to learn English vocabulary? What do you always do when you have a new word? How do you learn that word? How many words do you learn a day? Do you have anyspecial ways to lear English vocabulary? - Corrects and introduces the text. - Ask ss to scan the text and underline the words that you don’t know the meaning. - Write new words on theboard and ask ss to practice - Ask ss to read silently to find information about how to learn words - Asks ss to read the text. - Call on some ss to read the text.. Ss’ activities Listen answer.. Contents. and. - Look at and guess - Look at - Answer - Listen - Answer. - Listen - Scan and underline the new words - Copy down and practice - Read silently to find out information - Read the text. - Read.. I. Read 1. New words. - make a list: - mother tunge (n): - learn by heart: - in order to: - way (n): - piece of paper (n): - stick (v): - underline (v): - hinghlight (v): - revesion(n):.

(78) Period 30 Class 8A. Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Class 8B. Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Teacher’ activities II. Presentation (40’) * While – reading: - Asks ss to read the text again and do exercise 1 - Asks some ss to read their answer - Corrects. Ss’ activities. Contents. - Read the text again and do ex1 - Answer. 2. Exercises Ex1: True or false.. - Correct. a) F: All language learners => some language learners b) T c) F: tries to learn => not try to learn d) T Ex2: Answer the questions.. - Asks ss to read the text again and do exercise 2 - Asks some ss to read their answer. - Read the text again and do ex2 - Answer. - Corrects. Introduces the structure: Modal ‘Should,. - Listen and copydown. * Post - reading - Call on ss to practice reading the text aloud.. - Read the text aloud. a) No, learners learn words in different ways. b) Because sentences help them remember the use of new words. c) To remember words better, learners write examples, underline or highlight them. d) They may think they can’t do so. Instead, they learn only important words. e) Revision is necessary in learning words. f) Learners should try different ways of learning words to find out what is the best. * Modal sentences: Language learners should try different ways oflearning the same number words - How should I learn words? 3. Practice How to learn new words.

(79) - Asks Ss to practice in groups to find out the best ways the learn words - Controls and corrects. - Work in groups. - Learning them by heart making up sentences with them. - Use the dictionary to look up - Call on some ss their meaning..... present. 3. Consolidation. (2’) - T retells the contents of the lesson. - Ss listen and remember. 4. Homework. (1') - Read, answer questions - Do exercises 5, 6 (p34 - 36). - Read and prepare (Unit 5: Write). Date of prepare: …………………………… Class 8A. Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Class 8B. Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Period 31. Unit 5: STUDY HABITS (Cont’) Write I. AIMS. 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson, students’ll be able to know the way to write an informal letter use the information in the box. - Vocabulary: Christmas vacation, celebrate, Lunar New year Festival..... - Grammar: Form of informal letter 2. Skills: - To develop writing a letter to friends using the information 3. Attitude: - They know about people, culture. Then they love their country. II.TEACHING AIDS. 1. Teacher: Text book, plan. 2. Students: Text books, notebooks, pens. III. PROCEURES. 1. Check the old lesson: (4') - A student reread the text. 2. New lesson: Introduce the new lesson. (1’) Teacher’ activities I.Warm up (2’) - Ask ss some questions: What is weather like today? How are you today? Who is absent today? …………... Ss’ activities - Listen answer.. and. Contents.

(80) II. Presentation (35’) * Pre – writing - Show the letter inthe book (p51) and ask ss some questions. What is this? Do you often write to some one? What do you write?. - Look at the I. Write letter and answer 1. Form of personal letter. 1. Heading: write’s address and ` date. 2. Opening / Salutation: Dear, ... 3. Body of the letter: Content of the letter (reason writing the letter, idea, arrangement…) How many parts are there in 4. Closing: Regards / Love/ Your a informal letter? friend/ best wishes… Do you know how they are call? - Explain form of informal - Listen & copy 2. Idetify sections the letter Hoa letter down Wrote about at the end of term. - Ask ss to read the letter - Read aloud P51. - Explain some new words. - Listen & copy * New words: down - Christmas vacation(n): - celebrate(v): - Lunar New year Festival(n): - result (v): - Ask ss to read the letter - Read silently & again to identify the identify sections sections. - Ask ss to indentify the - Lable sections then lable them with correct letter. - Call on ss answer. - Answer - Give correct answer. - Copy down 1. B 2. D 3. A - Ask ss some questions - Listen and 4. C about the letter. answer Who wrote the letter? Who received it? What subjects did Hoa get good grade? Was her Math result good? What did her teacher ask her to do? What is she going to do? * While - writing - Introduces the information - Listen to the 3. Write a letter. and asks ss to write a letter, teacher. Write a.

(81) using the words given - Compare the writing with a partner. - Asks ss to read their writing.. letter - Compare. Lan’s address: ……… Date: ………………. - Read the writings1. - Corrects (on the board). - Correct.. Dear Donna, Thanks for your letter. I’m pleased to hear you had a happy mother’s Day. I received my second semester report card last month. I got good grades for Geography, Physics and Math, but my English and History results were poor. My teachers told me to improve them and I think I’ll have to study harder next school year. In a few weeks, we are going to celebrate the Mid-Autumn Festival. That’s a moon festival in Autumn or Fall in Viet Nam. I’m going to Ha Long Bay with my aunt and uncle by bus this afternoon. I’ll send you a postcard from there. Write soon and tell me all your news. Best Lan. * Post – writing - Ask ss to write the letter in their notebooks. - Ask ss some questions aboutcontents ofthe letter. Who wrote the letter? Who received it? Was her Math result good? What is she going to do? - Correct. - Copy down in their notebook - Answer. - Listen. 3. Consolidation. (2’) - T retells the contents of the lesson. 4. Homework. (1') - Do ex 9 (p37) in workbook. - Read "Unit 5 - Language focus". KIỂM TRA 15’.

(82) I. Questions: Rewrite the following sentences: (10 points) 1) Nga / me / to/ book/ regulary. / told / read 2) My / off / asked / television / to / switch / father / the/ me. 3) My/ teacher / said / I/ should / practice / speaking / English / every day. 4) My / I / said / brother / shouldn’t / late / up / stay II. Answer: (4 x 2, 5 = 10 pts) Câu Rewrite following sentences. Đáp án Điểm 1) Nga told me to read book regulary. 2,5 the 2) My father asked me to switch off the television. 2,5 3) My teacher said I should practice speaking English 2,5 every day. 4) My brother said I shouldn’t stay up late 2,5. *********************************************** Date of prepare: …………………………… Class 8A. Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Class 8B. Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Period 32. Unit 5: STUDY HABITS (Cont’) Language focus I. AIMS. 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson, students’ll be able to review and practice adverbs of manner, modal, commands, requests and advice in reported speech. - Vocabulary: - Grammar: Adverbs of manners Model: should Commands, requests and advice in reported speech 2. Skills: - To practice doing exercises. 3. Attitude: - Hardworking and like subject. II.TEACHING AIDS. 1. Teacher: Text book, plan. 2. Students: Text books, notebooks, pens. III. PROCEDURES. 1. Check the old lesson. - No check 2. New lesson:.

(83) Introduce the new lesson. (1’) Teacher’ activities I. Warm up (4’) - Ask ss some questions: How are you today? Which subject do you need to improve? What do you do to improve your English? II. Revision (12’) - Asks ss to repeat the form and the use of advebs of manner. - Ask ss to note some special advebs.. - When you want to advice smb what modals you use. - Ask ss to give examples - Write examples in exs 3, 4 (p53) in text book on the board. - Give form of reported speech form the examples. III. Practice (25’) - Asks Ss to do exercise 1: Complete the dialogues using the adverbs of manner in the box. Ss’ activities Listen answer.. and. - Repeat. - Pay attention and copy down. - Listen and answer - Make sentences - Look at and copydown - Listen and copy down. - Listen and complete. Contents. I. Revision. 1. Adverbs of manner. + Form: adj + ly => adverb Eg: quick => quickly Note: good => well hard => hard. fast =>fast + Use: To express how an action do. 2. Modal: Should / ought to Ex: You should go to the dentist once a month 3. Reported speech. Eg: Miss Jackson asked / told me to give you this dictionary. => Command & request in reported speech. S + asked / told + O + to infi Eg2:Miss Jackson said you should work harder on your Spanish pronounciation =>advice inreported speech. S + said + O + should +Vinfi II. Exercises. Ex 1. Complete the dialogues.

(84) - Call on ss to practice - Corrects. - Practice inpairs - Correct. - Explains how to do exercise 3. Suppose you are Tim’s mother Report Miss Jackson’s commands and requests in her conversation with Tim’s mother by changing commands , request in to inderect ones. - Asks ss to do exercise 3 - Asks some ss to practice - Controls and corrects. - Listen and practice. - Now you follow similar introductions as ex3, report Miss Jackson’s advices to Tim Note: Should unchange in reported speech. - Have ss to practice in pairs - Control andcorrect.. 3. Consolidation. (2’). - Do ex - Work in pairs - Correct. 1) hard; 2) fast; 3) badly 4) softly Ex 3: Command and request into reported speech.. a) Miss Jackson asked me to wait for her outside her office. b) Miss Jackson told me to give you your report card for this semester. c) Miss Jackson asked me to help you with your Spanish pronunciation d) Miss Jackson asked me to meet her next week. - Listen and do ex Ex 4: Advice in reported 4 speech. - Work inpairs - Correct. a) Miss Jackson said you should spend more time on Spanish pronunciation b) Miss Jackson said you should practice speaking Spanish everyday c) Miss Jackson said you should listen to....on Tv. d) Miss Jackson said you should practice reading...in Spanish. e) Miss Jackson said you should use.....Spanish words..

(85) - T retells the contents of the lesson. - Ss listen and remember. 4. Homework. (1') - Do the exercises again. - Make sentences. - Read (Unit 6 - Getting started - Listen and read). ************************************************ Date of prepare: …………………………….. Class 8A. Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Class 8B. Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Period 33. UNIT 6: THE YOUNG PIONEERS CLUB Getting started - Listen and read. I. AIMS. 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson, students’ll be able to talk about plan and intentions in the future. - Vocabulary: enroll(v), fill out (v), application form(n), hobby(n), draw (v), sign(v), act (v), out door > < indoor. - Grammar: Like / enjoy + V-ing. 2. Skills: - Practice listening and reading the dialogue, complete Nga's details. 3. Attitude: - Understand more about culture, people in many countries. Then love their country. II.TEACHING AIDS. 1. Teacher: Text book, plan, cassette, tape, picture. 2. Students: Text books, notebooks, pens. III. PROCEDURES. 1. Check the old lesson: - No check 2. New lesson: Introduce the new lesson. (1’) Teacher’ activities Ss’ activities Contents I. Warm up (10’) “Getting started” - Control and guide ss to - Listen and I. Getting started answer the questions practice in groups In Vietnam, which organizations are there for the young?.

(86) What will you have to do if you want to take part in a club? What activities do you often participate? Are these activities helpful for you and the general public? Which activities do you like best? Why? Do you plan to take part in any activities this summer? - Give new words base on - Listen and copy ss’discussion. down - Have ss to repeat new - Listen and words. repeat. II. Presentation (26’) - This summer Nga enrolls for some activities given by the Youth Union What does she have to do when she enrolls? - Read the dialogue - Explain some new words. - Listen answer. - helping blind people: - helping elderly people: - helping handicapped children: - cleaning up beaches/neighboor hoop: - taking part in sports/ art club/summer campaign:……. and II. Listen and read.. - Listen - Listen and copy * New words down - enroll(v): - fill out (v): - application form (n): - hobby (n): - draw (v): - sign (v): - act (v): - Ask ss to practice dialogue - Practice inpairs - out door > < indoor: - Correct pronounciation. - Listen - Explain structures - Listen and copy 1. Practice with a partner. down * New structures. - I like drawing. - I enjoy acting too - Ask ss to make sentences - Do as requested. => Like/ enjoy + V-ing with structures Eg: I like/ enjoy playing soccer - Ask ss to read the dialogue - Read silently 2. Complete Nga’s details. again and complete Nga’s and complete details..

(87) - Call on ss answer. - Correct. - Answer - Correct. + Name: Pham Mai Nga + Home address: 5 Tran Phu Street. + Phone number: Not available + Date of birth: April 22, 1989 + Sex: Female + Interests: Drawing, outdoor activities and acting.. III. Practice (5’) - Asks ss to practice in pairs - Work in pairs to ask and answer about Nga Eg: What’s her name? Where does she live? What’s her telephone number? What’s her date of birth? What are her hobbies? - Corrects S1: What is her name? - Correct S2: Her name is Pham Mai Nga ……… 3. Consolidation. (2’) - T retells the contents of the lesson. - Ss listen and remember. 4. Homework. (1') - Read and translate. - Do exercise 2 (p 39 - 40) in work book. - Prepare (Unit 6: Speak + Listen).. Date of prepare: …………………………. Class 8A. Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Class 8B. Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Period 34. UNIT 6: THE YOUNG PIONEERS CLUB (Cont’) Speak - Listen.

(88) I. AIMS. 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson, students’ ll be able to practice talking about asking for and responding to favors; offering and responding to assistance. Fill the missing words to get information. - Vocabulary: Unite, land, hold hand... - Grammar: Revision expression. Can/ Could you ……….? May I …….? Let me help... 2. Skills: - To practice listening comprehension; filling the missing words to get information. - To develop speaking, listening skills. 3. Attitude: - Understand more about culture, people in many countries. Then love their country. II.Teaching aids: 1. Teacher: Text book, plan, cassette, tape. 2. Students: Text books, notebooks, pens. III. PROCEDURES. 1. Check the old lesson.(4') - A student write new words. 2. New lesson: Introduce the new lesson. (1’) Teacher’ activities I. Warm up (2’) - Ask ss to answer the questions What’s your name? Where do you live? When were you born? What are your hobbies?.... Ss’ activities - Listen and answer. II. Presentation (35’) 1. Speak * Pre-speaking - In daily life, we always have - Pay attention to ask for and respond to favors; offer assistance what structures do you know to express these ideas. - Explain structures - Listen and copy down - Have ss to read the. Contents. - Listen and. I. Speak. * Asking for favors - Can/Could you help me,please? - Could you do me a favor? - I need a favor - Can/ could you...? * Responding - Certainly/Of course/sure.

(89) structures. - Ask ss to read the conversations in the book on pages 55, 56 - Call on some pairs practice * While-speaking - Ask ss to read situations - Explains how to do then asks ss to practice in pairs. repeat. - Work in pairs - Practice inpairs - Listen and read - Listen and practice. - Asks some pairs to practice - Work in pairs - Corrects - Correct. * Post-speaking - Asks Ss to practice in pairs to make real dialogue. Eg: Open the door Use your dictionary Borrow your money - Controls and corrects. 2. Listen * Pre- listening. Do you often sing English song? What song do you sing? Do you know the song “Children of the world unite” - Now, read the words of the song and tell me what the song is about. - Explain some new words. - Work in pairs. - Correct. - Listen and answer. - Read and tell: the song is about children - Listen and copy down. - No problem - What can I do for you? - How can I help you? - I’m sorry. I’m really busy * Offering assistance - May I help you? - Do you need any help? - Let me help you? * Responding Yes/ No. Thank you - Yes. That’s very kind of you - No. Thanks you. I’m fine Ex: S1: Excuse me? S2: Yes? S1: Could you show me the way to the nearest police station? S2: Go along this road about 300 matters. It’s on the left, opposite the post office. S1: Thank you very much. …………. *Practice S1: Could you do me a favor? S2: What can I do for you ? S1: Could you open the door, please ? S2: No problem. S1: Thank you very much. II. Listen. 1. New words - land (n): - unite (v): - holdhand: - shout (v):.

(90) - Let ss to read the song and have guess the missing words - Now you listen to the tape and complete the song by filling the words you hear in the blanks. * While-listening. - Read the song (twice) - Check with ss’ guessing - Call on ss answer - Correct. - Read and guess. 2. Fill in the missing words. - Pay attention. - Listen and complete - Check the guessing - Answer & correct - Write. (1) unite (3) right (5) north (7) of (9) show (11) out (13) world. (2) peace (4) love 6) south (8) world (10) place (12) stand. What’s main idea in this song? * Post- listening. - Guide ss to sing the song - Learn to sing - Control and correct. - Listen 3. Consolidation.(2’) - T retell the contents of the lesson. - Ss listen and remember. 4. Homework.(1') - Make conversation. - Do exercise 3 on page 40 in workbook. - Read and prepare (Unit 6: Read). Date of prepare: ........................................... Class 8A. Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Class 8B. Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Period 35. UNIT 6: THE YOUNG PIONEERS CLUB (Cont’) Read I. AIMS. 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson, students’ ll be able to read a text and answer the questions. Knowing about Ho Chi Minh Communist Youth Union. - Vocabulary: organization, encourage, citizen, skill, found, belove, campain, aim, establish, guideline…. - Grammar: Past simple tense (Review). 2. Skills: - To develop reading comprehension..

(91) 3. Attitude: - Understand more about culture, people in many countries. Then love their country. II.TEACHING AIDS. 1. Teacher: Text book, plan. 2. Students: Text books, notebooks, pens. III. PROCEDURES. 1. Check the old lesson:(4') - A student do exercise 3 in workbook. 2. New lesson: Introduce the new lesson. (1’) Teacher’ activities Ss’ activities I. Warm up (5’) - Ask ss some questions. - Listen and Do you often help blind answer people? Do you take part in sports and out door activities? Do you enjoy singing ? Do you know the song of the Ho Chi Minh Young Pioneer and Youth Organization (Y&Y)? - Let’s sing …. II. Presentation (32’) * Pre-reading - Ask ss some questions. Do you know any organizations similar to the Y & Y in Vietnam ? - Introduces: There are some in Vietnam. What are they ? Let’s read the text and find them. * While - reading - Read the text (twice) - Explain some new words and revies past simple tense. - Listen and answer. Contents. I. Read. - Listen and prepare. - Listen - Copy down. - Read and have students listen - Listen and and repeat. repeat. 1. New words - organization(n): - encourage(v): - citizen(n): - skill(v): - found(v): - belove(adj): - campain(n): - aim(v):.

(92) - establish(v): - guideline(v): - Read the passage for ss listen - Call some ss to read - Correct their pronunciation - Asks ss to read the text again and do exercise 1 - Asks some ss to read their answer - Corrects. - Listen - Read aloud - Read and do ex1 3. Exercises - Read. Ex1: Fill in the missing dates.. - Copy down. a) March, 1931 b) December 1976 c) their public awareness d) the guideliness Ex2: Answer the questions. a) From 16 to 30 b) On March 26 1931 c) HCM Communist Youth Union. d) Helping the handicapped, cleaning the environment, Green summer Volunteers Campaign… e) To help the young develop their pulic awareness and form their personality. f) Presedent HCM.. - Asks ss to read the text again - Practice and and do exercise 2 answer the questions - Asks some ss to read their - Read answer - Corrects. - Correct. * Post-reading - Ask ss to read the text aloud - Asks Ss to practice translating the text - Controls and corrects. - Read - Listen and practice - Listen. 3. Consolidation.(2’) - T retell the contents of the lesson. - Ss listen and remember. 4. Homework.(1') - Read, answer questions, translate the text - Do exercise 3 on page 40 in workbook. - Read and prepare (Unit 6 - Write). ******************************************** Date of prepare: ................................... Class 8A. Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Class 8B. Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: ……...

(93) Period 36. UNIT 6: THE YOUNG PIONEERS CLUB (Cont’) Write I. AIMS. 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson, students’ ll be able to write a simple letter about plan or intentions. - Vocabulary: Community, encourage, recycle, natural resources, side walk... - Grammar: The present simple with future meaning Be going to + V- infi S + be + V- ing. 2. Skills: - To develop writing write a simple letter about plan or intentions. 3. Attitude: - Like subject and more hardworking. II.TEACHING AIDS. 1. Teacher: Text book, plan. 2. Students: Text books, notebooks, pens. III. PROCEDURES. 1. Check the old lesson: - No check 2. New lesson: Introduce the new lesson. (1’) Teacher’ activities I. Warm up (4’) - Asks some questions When was the Youth Union founded? Can you name some social activities of the Youth Union? What do you often do for your organization? ………. Ss’ activities - Listen answer.. Contents. and. II. Presentation (37’) * Pre - writing - Introduces the notice on - Listen to teacher 1. Read the passage and page 58 complete the letter - This is the notice from Y & - Listen. Y to its members. You read it and tell me what activities.

(94) this organization is going to do - Explain some new words. - Listen and copy a. New words down - community (n): - encourage (n): - recycle (n): - natural resources(n): - side walk(n): - Ask ss to read the example - Read the letter b. Complete the letter letter then complete and complete - Ask ss to compare with a - Compare with a (1) community partner. partner (2) recycling - Call on ss answer - Answer (3) collect - Correct - Correct (4) send (5) recycling (6) save (7) earn (8) participating (9) planting * While-writing (10) helping - Asks ss to read the dialogue - Practice in pairs 2. Read the dialogue between between Hoa and her aunt and summarize hoa and her aunt. Then write and summarize Hoa's letter to her parents What will Hoa work for Y & Listen and telling what she is going to Y? answer do. - Asks ss to use the summary Listen and to write a letter to your prepare perents about the activites you are going to do. - Ask ss to compare and - Compare and check mistakes with a partner check mistakes - Call on ss to read aloud the - Read the letter letter. aloud Dear Mom and Dad, - Corrects - Correct I’m very happy to tell you that I’m going to join the Y&Y Green Group of my school. The Green Group is holding an environment month plan. We are going to clean the lakes’ banks on weekends. We are going to plat trees and flowers in the school garden and water them every afternoon after class. We are planting young trees and plants to sell to other school..

(95) * Post-writing - Corrects their writing, - Listen explains how to write - Give similar situation - Practice between Lan and Hoa. Imagine that you are Hoa write a similar letter. + Having the voluntary summer campaign + Going to correct rusbbish plant and water trees in the streets, teach street children English.... We hope that we can give more green color to the city and earn some money for our school Y&Y. The program is very interesting and useful, isn’t it? I will tell you more about the group activities later. Love, Hoa. 3. Consolidation.(2’) - T retell the contents of the lesson. - Ss listen and remember. 4. Homework.(1') - Practice writing. Write a similar letter. - Prepare new lesson. Unit6: Language focus. *********************************************** Date of prepare: .............................................. Class 8A. Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Class 8B. Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Period 37. UNIT 6: THE YOUNG PIONEERS CLUB (Cont’) Language focus I. AIMS. 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson, students’ ll be able to review and practice present tense with future meaning, gerunds and modals: Can/ could/ may… - Vocabulary: - Grammar: Present tense with future meaning..

(96) Gerunds Modals: Can/ could/ may… 2. Skills: - To practice doing exercise: Completing the dialogue, filling the information. 3. Attitude: - Like subject and more hardworking. II.TEACHING AIDS. 1. Teacher: Text book, plan. 2. Students: Text books, notebooks, pens. III. PROCEDURES. 1. Check the old lesson: - No check 2. New lesson: Introduce the new lesson. (1’) Teacher’ activities I. Warm up (2’) - Ask ss some questios: What is the weather the like today? How are you today? II. Revision (10’) - Beside “Will and be going to, we can use the present simple tense to express an arranged action Ex: When do they collect and empty garbage? They collect and empty garbage on January 9 - Asks ss to repeat the form and the use of regund and modal: May, can, could.. III. Practice (29’) - Asks ss to do exercise 1: You read the Spring activity program of Y & Y Pioneers organization and tell me what, when and where. Ss’ activities Listen answer.. Contents. and. - Listen and remember. I. Revision 1. Present simple with future meaning. Ex: When do they collect and empty garbage? They collect and empty garbage on January 9. - Listen and revise. 2. Gerunds + Like/ love/ hate + V-ing Eg: I like playing soccer Lan loves watching TV 3. Modal verbs: May, can, could using for a favor. Eg: Can/ Could you help me? May I help you?. - Listen and pepare II. Practice Ex 1: Practice with a partner - When do they plant and water trees along streets?.

(97) they’ll do in the program - Explain some new words - Have ss to practice in pairs - Corrects. - Listen - Practice in pairs - Correct. - Explains how to do ex2: Now you work in pairs talking about Ba & Lan’s hobbies by using “love, like, dislike and hate,, - Asks some pairs to practice - Controls and corrects. - Listen and prepare. - Explains how to do ex 3a Asking for favors and responding to favors using modals: May, can, could - Asks Ss to do exercise 3a - Asks some Ss to practice - Controls and corrects. - Listen. - Asks ss to do exercise 3b complete the dialogues using expressions in the boxes on page 55. - Asks some pairs to practice - Controls and corrects. - Practice in pairs - Correct. - Practice - Work in pairs - Correct. - Listen and practice - Practice - Correct. 3. Consolidation.(2’) - T retell the contents of the lesson.. On February 2 - Where do they plant and water trees along streets? In the city center streets - What time do they plant and water trees along street? They start at 7 am and finish at 4 pm. ......... Ex2: Work with a partner. - Ba loves playing soccer, but he doesn’t like washing up - Lan doesn’t like playing soccer and she doesn’t like washing up, either - Ba hates cooking meals, but he likes performing music - Lan likes cooking meals and performing music. ........................ Ex3: Work with a partner. a. Use the expressions in the box to ask for a favor. A. Can you buy a ticket for me? B. Can you take me across the road? C. Could you help me with math problem? D. Can you water the flowers in the gardern? b) Complete the dialogues. 1. Can I help you? 2. Do you need any help? 3. Let me help you. 4. That’s very kind of you..

(98) - Ss listen and remember. 4. Homework.(1') - Do the exercises again. Make sentences. - Prepare new lesson: Revision Date of prepare: ………………………… Class 8A. Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Class 8B. Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Period 38. REVISION I. AIMS. 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson, students’ ll be able to review main grammars from unit 4 to unit 6. - Vocabulary: - Grammar: Past Simple tense, Prepositions of time, Used to, Adverbs of manner, Modal verbs, Reported speech , Present simple with future meaning, Regrunds. 2. Skills: - To practice doing exercises. 3. Attitude: - Like subject and more hardworking. II.TEACHING AIDS. 1. Teacher: Text book, plan, secondboard. 2. Students: Text books, notebooks, pens. III. PROCEDUERS. 1. Check the old lesson: - No check 2. New lesson: Introduce the new lesson. (1’) Teacher’ activities. Ss’ activities. Contents. I. Warm up (4’) - Ask ss some questions - Listen and How are you today? answer Do you like learning English? Is your English good? What do you do to improve your English? II. Revision (15’) - Help ss to revise - Listen and grammars. revise The past simple tense.. I. Revision 1. The past simple tense. (+) S + V-ed - irregular.

(99) - Ask ss to make examples. - Copy down. - Ask ss to retell form of “used to” - Ask ss to make examples. (-) S + didn’t + V-infi (?) Did + S + V-infi? Yes, S + did / No, S + did not - Retell and copy 2. Used to + V-infi down Used to + V-infi (-) S + didn’t used to-infi. - Ask ss to tell prepositions of time they’ve learned. - Revise and write down. 3. Prepositions of time. - in + year (in 1997) month (in June) - on + date (on 17th) + date, month, year (on June 2rd 2008) + day (on Monday) - at + time (at 7.00). - Ask ss to revise form of “Adverbs of manner”. - Practice and copy down. 4. Adverbs of manner. + Form: adj + ly => adverb Eg: quick => quickly Note: good => well hard => hard. fast => fast. - Help ss to revise modal verbs. - Retell and copy 5. Modal + V-infi down Ex: You should go to the dentist once a month May I help you?. - Help ss to revise reported speech. - Retell and copy 6. Reported speech. down Eg: Miss Jackson asked/told me to give you this dictionary. Miss Jackson said you should work harder on your Spanish pronounciation. - Ask ss to revise form of regunds. - Revise and copy down. 7. Gerunds + V-ing Eg: I like playing soccer Lan loves watching T.V. III. Exercises: - Give exercises on second board. - Look at the board. II. Exercises Ex1: Complete sentenses use the correct form of verb in the bracket 1. When we (be)...............small, our.

(100) - Ask ss to do exercises. - Do exercise. family (live)........in the countryside. 2. The boys like (play)........game but hate (do) ...........lessons 3. There (be)............many volunteers in Sea Game 22nd in Viet Nam in 2003 Ex2. Underline correct answer 1. She ran very (quick/quickly).............so I don’t catch up with her. 2. Hoa is a(good/ well).......student 3. Can you speak more(slow/ slowly)....I can’t understand what you mean?. - Call on ss answer. - Answer. - Correct and give correct answer. - Correct copy down. Ex3: Report the sentences. 1. “Please lend me your dictionary, Quang said Hoa 2. “Can you help me with my home work?,, Minh said to her sister 3. “You should practice speaking English everyday,, the teacher said 4. “You shouldn’t translate each sentence into Vietnamese,, my brothe told me. Ex1: and 1. were - lived 2. cry 3. playing - doing 4. were 5. collect Ex2: 1.quickly 2.well 3.good 4.slowly Ex3: 1. Hoa told Quang to lend her his dictionary 2. Minh asked her sister to help her with her homework 3. The teacher said they should practice speaking English every.

(101) day. 4. My brother said I shouldn’t translate each sentence into Vietnamese. 3. Consolidation.(2’) - T retell the contents of the lesson. - Ss listen and remember. 4. Homework.(1') - Do the exercises again - Prepare for written test 45’. ************************************************ Date of prepare: …………………….. Class 8A. Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Class 8B. Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Period 39. THE WRITTEN TEST (No2) Time: 45 minutest I. AIMS. 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson, students’ ll be able to do the test. - To know the level of students. 2. Skills: - Practice listening, reading, writing, language focus. 3. Attitude: - Like subject and more hardworking. II. TEACHING AIDS. 1. Teacher: Plan, photo tests. 2. Students: schoolthings. III. PROCEDURES. 1. Matrix: Cấp độ Tên Chủ đề. I. Listening. Nhận biết TN. TL. Thông hiểu TN. TL Listen and fill in the missing words. Vận dụng Cấp độ thấp Cấp độ cao Cộng TN. TL. TN. TL.

(102) 5câu 0,5 đ. Số câu Số điểm Tỉ lệ % II. Reading. Số câu Số điểm Tỉ lệ % III. Language focus. Số câu Số điểm Tỉ lệ %. Read and tick T or F for the sentences below 5câu 0,5 đ. 5 câu 2,5 đ 25%. Circle the best option 4 câu 0,5 đ. 4 câu 2,0 đ 20% Rerrange the words to make meaningful sentence. IV. Wrting. 3 câu 1,0đ. Số câu Số điểm Tỉ lệ % Tổng số câu Tổng số điểm Tỉ lệ %. 5 câu 2,5đ 25%. 4 câu 2,0 điểm 20%. 10 câu 5,0 điểm 50%. 3 câu 3,0 điểm 30%. 3 câu 3,0 đ 30%. 17 câu 10 điểm 100%. 2. Questions. I. Listening . Listen and fill in the missing words (2,5 pts). One (1)...................lived comfortably. His chicken (2)............. many eggs. They sell the eggs to buy food and clothes. One day, one of his chickens laid a (3)................ egg. His wife (4).................. more and asked him to (5)................... all the chickens. At last he had no kinds of any eggs. II. Reading. Read the passage then tick true or false for the sentences below ( 2,5 pts ) Every years students in many countries learn English. Some of these are young children. Others are teenagers. Many are adults. Some learn at school, others study by themselves. A few learn English just by hearing the language in film, on TV, in the.

(103) office, or among their friends. But not many are lucky enough to do that. Most people must work hard to learn another language. Learning another language! Learning English! Why do all these people want to learn English? It is not difficult to answer that question. Many boys and girls learn English at school because it is one of their subjects. They study their own language (in England, or American, or Australia, many boys and girls study their own language which is English , and math ... and another language , perhaps French, or German, or Spanish .) Many adults learn English because it is useful for their work. Teenagers often learn English for their higher studies because some of their books are in English at the college or university. Other people learn English because they want to read newspapers or magazines in English. Tick T (true) or F (fasle). T F 1. According to the writer, English is not popular in the world 2. Many boys and girls learn English at school because it is one of their subjects. 3. Many adults learn English because it helps them in their work. 4. Other people learn English because they want to go abroad. 5. Most people mustn’t work hard to learn another language. III. Language focus. Circle the best option A, B, C or D. (2,0pts) 1. I often have Math and English .......................Mon day. A. at B. on C. in D. to 2. Mary.......................... many gifts at last Christmas. A. receives B. receiving C. received D. receive 3. I used to .................... in Kim Binh A. stay B. stayed C. staying D. stays 4. She speaks English very…………….. A. best B. well C. good D. better IV. Writing Rerrange the words to make meaningful sentence.(3,0pts) 1. exercse/ take/ You/ more/ should. 2. it/ top/ on/ He/ me/ to/ shelf/ put/ told/ the. 3. should/ to/ not/ You/ him/ listen. 3. Answer and points. Câu. I. Listening. Đáp án 1. farmer 2. laid 3. golden 4. wanted 5. cut Tapecript: One farmer lived comfortably. His chicken laid many. Điểm 0,5 0,5 0,5 0,5 0,5.

(104) eggs. They sell the eggs to buy food and clothes. One day, one of his chickens laid a golden egg. His wife wanted more and asked him to cut all the chickens. At last he had no kinds of any eggs.. II. Reading. III. Language focus.. IV. Writing. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.. F T T F F. 0,5 0,5 0,5 0,5 0,5. 1. 2. 3. 4.. B C A B. 0,5 0,5 0,5 0,5. 1. You should take more exercise. 2. He told me to put it on the top shelf. 3. You should not listen to him.. 1,0 1,0 1,0. Date of prepare: ……………………….. Class 8A. Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Class 8B. Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Period 40. Unit7. MY NEIGHBORHOOD Getting started – Listen and read I. AIMS. 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson, students can read and listen the dialogue. Complete the sentences. - Vocabulary: Pancake (n), serve (v), close by, corner (adv).... - Grammar: Present perfect tense with since and for 2. Skills: - Practice listening and reading the dialogue in pairs, completing the sentences. 3. Attitude: - Understand about culture, people in many countries and love their country. II.TEACHING AIDS. 1. Teacher: Text book, plan, cassette and tape, secondboard..

(105) 2. Students: Text books, notebooks, pens. III. PROCEDURES. 1. Check the old lesson: - No check 2. New lesson: Introduce the new lesson. (1’) Teacher’ activities I. Warm up (10’) “Getting started” - Control ss to play game “Networks” about names of places aroud your neighborhood. - Asks ss to practice matching - Controls and corrects - Ask ss some questions. Ex: Is there a stadium near your house? Is it big / new...?. Ss’ activities - Play game. Contents 1. Getting started Supermarket Hotel. Places in the neighborhooh. - Practice - Correct - Listen and answer. Hospital. a) grocery store b) stadium c) wet market d) drug store e) hairdresser’s f) swimming pool II. Presentation (35’) - Introduce: Today we will revise the names of places in the neighborhood and learn the present perfect tense. - Have students look at the dialogue on page 63. Then introduce: You are going to hear the dialogue between Na and Nam. You listen to it and answer the following questions. Who is new to the neighborhood? Does Nam live in the neighborhood? What is around the corner in. - Listen to teacher 2. Listen and read. - Listen and answer. + Na + Yes, he does. Bank.

(106) the neighborhood? + A restaurant Is the food good? - Explain some new words and - Listen and copy grammar down “The present perfect tense”. - Read and guide ss to read the - Listen and conversation. repeat - Call on ss to practice in pairs - Practice in pairs - Correct their pronunciation - Asks ss to read again and complete the sentences. - Asks some ss to read their answer. - Correct. - Read silently and complete the sentences - Answer - Correct. 3. Consolidation.(3’) - T retell the contents of the lesson. - Ss listen and remember.. a. New words - pancake (n): B¸nh bét m×, trøng, b¬ r¸n hai mÆt - serve (v): Phôc vô - close by: GÇn ®©y - corner (adv): Gãc b. Grammar. The present perfect tense + Use: To express an action happened in the past but continue now. We often use since / for to talk about time of action. Since + a point of time (Mèc thêi gian) For + a period of time (Kho¶ng thêi gian). + Form: (+) S + have/ has + PII + 0 (-) S + have/ has + not + PII + 0 (?) Have/ Has + S + PII + 0? Yes, S + have / has No, S + haven’t / hasn’t Ex: We have been here since last week. We have lived here for 10 years 1.1. practice the dialogue with a partner.. 2.2. Complete the sentences. Use the words from the dialogue. a) new c) tired e) Hue. b) last week d) restaurant f) pancakes.

(107) 4. Homework.(1') - Read and translate the conversation again. - Do exercises 1, 2 on page 44 in workbook. - Prepare (Unit7: Speak - Listen).. Date of prepare: ……………………… Class 8A. Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Class 8B. Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Period 41. Unit7. MY NEIGHBORHOOD (Cont’) Speak - Listen I. AIMS. 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson, students’ ll be able to read the dialogue, practice talking about how to send a letter or a parcel at the post office. To practice listening comprehension: filling the missing words to get information. - Vocabulary: - Parcel, airmail, surface mail, charge, culture house, Millennium cinama, exhibition.... - Grammar: Can / Could you ……….? May I …….? I’d like/ want to do... 2. Skills: - Practice listening and reading the dialogue in pairs, filling the missing words. 3. Attitude: - Understand about culture, people in many countries and love their country. II.TEACHING AIDS. 1. Teacher: Text book, plan, cassette and tape, secondboard. 2. Students: Text books, notebooks, pens. III. PROCEDURES. 1. Check the old lesson: - No check 2. New lesson: Introduce the new lesson. (1’).

(108) Teacher’ activities Ss’ activities I. Warm up (4’) “Chain game” - Practice - Explains and asks ss to practice Eg: Ss1: There is a - Control and correct post office in our neighborhood. Ss2: There is a post office, a bank in our neighborhood P3:.... II.Presentation (20’) 1. Speak * Pre-speaking - Introduces the pictures (p64) - Look at the and asks: pictures and Who is this ? answer Where is she ? What does she go there for? Do you know how much the domestic mail charges? - Read the dialogue and ask ss to - Listen and find find out new words and out new words grammar.. * While-speaking - Asks ss to read the dialogue - Explains how to do then asks ss to practice in pairs, using the information in the box. - Asks some pairs to practice. - Read in pairs - Listen and practice.. - Corrects. - Practice in pairs (5 pairs) - Listen. * Post-speaking - Asks Ss to practice in pairs to. - Practice in pairs. Contents. I. Speak. 1. Practice the dialogue with a partner.. a. New words - parcel (n): - airmail (n): - surface mail (n): - charge (n): b. Grammar. Revision expression. - Can / Could you ……….? - May I …….? - I’d like / want to do.... 2. Look at the following brochure and the information in the box. Make similar dialogue. A: Can I help you ? B: I’d like to send a letter to Kon Tum. A: Do you want to send it airmail or surface mail ? B: Surface mail, please. A: Let me weigh the letter first. Oh, 20g. That’s be 800d B: Here you are. A: Thank you very much..

(109) make real dialogue - Controls and corrects. S1: Next please. S2: I’d like to send a parcel to Phu Tho. S1: Do you want to send it airmail or surface mail ? S2: Surface mail, please. S1: Let me weigh the letter first. Oh, 50g. It’s 1,800d S2: Here you are. S1: Thank you very much. 2. Listen (17’) * Pre-listening - Ask ss some questions. What do you often do on the weekend? Do you often go to the movies ? What kind of films do you like? Do you remember Na? - Na has moved to a new neighborhood. She is talking to Nam about activites she’ll do at the weekend. Firstly you look at the places and programs in your book - Explain words in the box.. - Ask ss to study what’s on this week advertisement and guess the place and program to fill in the blank in the advertisement. * While-listening - Read the tape twice. - Asks ss to compare their result with a partner - Asks some ss to read their answer. - Corrects. …………. - Correct. II. Listen - Listen and answer. - Listen. - Listen and copy down. - Listen and prepare. - culture house: - exhibition: - Millennium cinama: - Vs = versus: - town ground: 1. Listen to the conversation. Then fill the blank in each of the advertisement with one phrase from the box.. - Listen and filling the missing words. - Compare - Read - Copy down. 1. The Newcomer 2. Town Ground 3. English Speaking Contest 4. Culture House.

(110) - Asks some ss to listen and do exercise 2. - Asks ss to compare their result with a partner and read their answer. - Read the tape again to correct 3. Post-listening: - Asks ss to practice “finding someone Who” - Controls and corrects.. - Listen and do - Practice.. 2. Listen to the conversation again and check (v) the correct box for True, False or No information.. - Listen and check - Practice - Correct. a) T b) F c) F. d) T e) T f) No information. 3. Consolidation.(2’) - T retell the contents of the lesson. - Ss listen and remember. 4. Homework.(1') - Make conversation. - Do exercises 3, 4 on pages 45, 46 in workbook. - Read and prepare (Unit 7 - Read). ***************************************************** Date of prepare: ………………………… Class 8A. Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Class 8B. Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Period 42. Unit7. MY NEIGHBORHOOD (Cont’) Read I. AIMS. 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson, students’ ll be able to read a short passage and answer the questions, getting the information about the place. - Vocabulary: Opened daily, air-conditioned, humid, resident.... - Grammar: Compare with the same as; different from. 2. Skills: - Reading a shopping and do exercise: True or false. 3. Attitude: - Understand about culture, people in many countries and love their country. II.TEACHING AIDS. 1. Teacher: Text book, plan. 2. Students: Text books, notebooks, pens. III. PROCEDURES..

(111) 1. Check the old lesson:(4') - A student do exercise 3 in workbook. 2. New lesson: Introduce the new lesson. (1’) Teacher’ activities Ss’ activities I. Warm up (3’) - Asks ss some questions - Listen and Where do you go when you answer want to buy something? Where can you buy everything? Have you ever gone there? ………… II. Presentation (34’) * Pre-reading - Ask ss to look at the advertisement on page 67 ? What do you know about the text by reading the advertisement? ? What can we do in the shopping mall? - Explain contents of advertisement * While - reading - Read the text twice - Explain words and phrases in the text and introduces the structure. - Listen and answer. Contents. I. Read. - Listen - Listen and read silently - Listen and copy down. 1. New words - roof (n): - convenient (adj): - mall (n): - resident (n): - discount (n): - take one’s business: - humid (adj): - a wider selection of products: - air-conditioned: - opened daily: 2. Grammar. +To be different from Eg:The color of my pen is different form the color of your pen. +The same as.

(112) - Asks ss to read the text again and do exercise 1 - Asks some ss to read their answer - Corrects. - Read silently and do ex1 - Read. - Asks ss to read the text again and do exercise 2 - Asks some ss to read their answer - Corrects.. - Read silently and do ex2 - Answer. * Post-reading - Ask ss to read the text aloud - Asks ss to practice in groups of three are the resident in that area, talking about the mall) - Controls and corrects S1: Have you ever been to the. - Correct. - Correct and copy down. - Read aloud - Work in groups. - Correct. Eg:My pen is the same as your pen 3. Exercises Ex1. True or False a) F: The mall is open daily b) F: There are 50 stores in the mall c) F: Not everyone is pleased about the new mall. d) T e) T Ex2: Answer. a) It is very different from the present shopping area. All the shops are under one roof. That will be very convenient, especially during the hot summer months. Customers will shop in comfort and won’t notice the weather. b) In the mall, there are 50 air conditioner speciallity stores, 4 movie theaters and 10 restaurants; there is also a children’s play area. c) They think the new shopping mall will take their business. d) The stores in the mall will offer a wider selection of products, some kinds of goods are at cheaper prices..

(113) new mall ? S2: No, I haven’t S1: I’ve been there twice S3: What are the prices there ? S1: Oh, the prices are cheaper than at the small stores nearby .. 3. Consolidation.(2’) - T retell the contents of the lesson. - Ss listen and remember. 4. Homework.(1') - Read, answer questions, translate the text - Do exercise 5 on page 46 in workbook. - Read and prepare (Unit 7 - Write). *********************************************** Date of prepare: ……………………… Class 8A. Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Class 8B. Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Period 43. Unit7. MY NEIGHBORHOOD (Cont’) Write I. AIMS. 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson, students’ ll be able to know form of a community notice. Practice writing notice about activities' classroom. 2. Skills: - Practice writing a notice. 3. Attitude: - Understand about culture, people in many countries and love their country. II.TEACHING AIDS. 1. Teacher: Text book, plan. 2. Students: Text books, notebooks, pens. III. PROCEDURES. 1. Check the old lesson:(4') - Read the text and answer the questions. 2. New lesson: - Introduce the new lesson. (1’) Teacher’ activities. Ss’ activities. Contents.

(114) I. Warm up (4’) - Asks some questions - What is opening in Nam’s neighborhood ? - How many stores are there in the mall ? - What do the residents in the area think about the new mall? II. Presentation (33’) * Pre-writing - Read the notice - Introduces some new words. - Asks ss to read the notice and answer some questions: - Who hold the meeting ? - What do they hold the meeting for? - When is the meeting ? - Where is the meeting ? - Who can they contact for more information? - How many parts are there in a notice? - What’re they? - Corrects. * While-writing - Ask ss to read information in part2 - Asks ss to practice writing a similar notice for the English Club - Asks ss to change their writing with a partner. - Call on some ss to remark their friends’ writing. - Listen and answer. - Listen - Listen and copy down. I. Read the community notice 1. New words. - effect (v): - hardware store (n): - contact (v): - store owner (n):. - Read aloud and answer the questions. - Copy down. 2. Form of notice + Topic + Time + Place + Participants. - Read aloud. 3. Use similar format to write a notice about the English - Listen and write Speaking contest below. - Change the writing - Remark. The school English Speaking Club “holding a speaking contest to celebrate the Teacher’s Day”..

(115) - Corrects. - Copy down. * Post-writing - Asks ss to write a notice for a class meeting, a picnic, a sport club... - Call on ss answer - Corrects. - Practice - Answer - Correct. Date: November 15 Time: From 7.30 to 10.00 Place: Hall 204 building G Please contact Tran Thi Thu Hang of class 8H at the above address for more information 4. Write one or two notices.. The school Sport Club of class 8A “organizing a picnic to near the lake at weekend” Date: December 18 Time: From 8.00 am to 4 pm Place: School gade Please contact Dang Thu Ha for more information. 3. Consolidation.(2’) - T retell the contents of the lesson. - Ss listen and remember. 4. Homework.(1') - Practice writing. - Do exercise 6 on page 47 in workbook. - Read "Unit 7 - Language focus".. Date of prepare: .................................... Class 8A. Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Class 8B. Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Period 44. Unit7. MY NEIGHBORHOOD (Cont’) Language focus I. AIMS. 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson, students’ ll be able to review and practice present perfect tense, comparison with like, (not) as/so … as, (not) the same as, different from. 2. Skills:.

(116) - To practice doing exercises. 3. Attitude: - Understand about culture, people in many countries and love their country. II.TEACHING AIDS. 1. Teacher: Text book, plan. 2. Students: Text books, notebooks, pens. III. PROCEDURES. 1. Check the old lesson: - No check 2. New lesson: Introduce the new lesson. (1’) Teacher’ activities I.Warm up (2’) - Ask ss some questions. ? How long have you lived in Lung Cu? ? Do you love your hometown? ? What are there near your house? II. Revision (24’) - Asks ss to repeat the form and the use of the present perfect - Write on the board. - Ask ss to repeat comparision with like; (not) as...as; (not) the same as; differnt from - Write on the board.. Ss’ activities. Contents. - Listen and answer. - Repeat. - Copy down. - Repeat - Copy down. I. Revision 1. The present perfect + Use: To express an action happened in past but continue now .We often use since / for to talk about time of action Since + a point of time For + a period of time + Form: (+) S + have/has + PII + 0. (-) S + have/has + not + PII+ 0 (?) Have / has + S + PII+ 0? Yes, S + have / has No, S + haven’t / hasn’t Exs: We have been here since last week. We have lived here for 10 years 2. Comparision + (not) as/so … as: B»ng / kh«ng b»ng nhau + (not) the same as: Gièng / kh«ng gièng nhau + different from: Kh¸c nhau.

(117) III. Practice - Asks ss to do exercise 1: Match each verb to its participle - Asks some ss to practice - Corrects. - Listen - Practice - Copy down. - Explains how to do ex2: Complete the expressions. Use for or since - Asks ss to do exercise 2 - Asks some ss to practice - Controls and corrects. - Listen. - Explains how to do ex 3: Complete sentences. Use the present perfect form of the verbs in brackets. - Asks ss to do exercise 3 - Asks some ss to practice. - Listen. - Do ex - Practice - Correct. II. Exercises Ex1: Match each verb to its past participle go - gone eat - eaten live - lived attend - attended see - seen do - done write - written work - worked collect - collected Ex2: Complete the expressions. Use for or since - for five minutes - since January - since 1990 - since the summer - for three hours - for 10 weeks - since Friday - for 20 years Ex3: Complete the sentences. Use the present perfect form of the verbs in the brackets.. - Do ex - Practice. - Controls and corrects. - Correct. - Asks ss to do exercise 4: Complete the dialogue - Asks some pairs to practice - Controls and corrects. - Listen - Practice - Correct. b) We have not eaten in that restaurant for two years c) I haven’t seen her since yesterday d) They have attended Quang Trung school since last year. e) My Dad has worked for this company for 20 years f) Ba has collected stamps since 1995 Ex4: Complete the conversation 1) I have been here since last week 2) I hope so 3) How long have you lived here ? 4) Is there a post office near here ?.

(118) 5) I want to send this post card to my parents. 6) It looks very beautiful. 7) Have you ever been there? 8) I have seen it through films and magazines Ex5: Complete sentences. - Asks ss to do exercise 5: - Listen Compare things in the pictures - Asks some ss to practice - Practice - Controls and corrects - Correct. c) different from / not as/ so cheap as d) the same as e) as cheap / expensive as f) different from g) as long as h) not as modern as i) not as / so cheap as. 3. Consolidation.(2’) - T retell the contents of the lesson. - Ss listen and remember. 4. Homework.(1') - Do ex7 on pages 47, 48 in workbook. WRITTEN TEST Time: 15 minutes I. Questions 1. Complete the expression. Ues for or since (5pts). a.................five minutes b................November c................2001 d................the fall e................7 hours 2. Complete the sentences. Use the form of the verbs in brackets (5 pts). a. We....................................in that restaurant. (not eat) b. I........................................her since yesterday. (not see) c. They.................................Quang Trung school since last year. (attend) d. My mother.......................for her company for 20 years. (work) e. Ba.....................................stamps since 1992. (collect) II. Answers and marks Câu 1. Complete the expression. Ues for or since. Đáp án a. For b. Since c. Since d. Since. Điểm 1,0 1,0 1,0 1,0.

(119) e. For 2. Complete the sentences. Use the form of the verbs in brackets. 1,0 1,0 1,0 1,0 1,0 1,0. a. haven't eaten b. haven't seen c. Have attended d. have worked e. has collected. ************************************************ Date of prepare: …………………………. Class 8A. Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Class 8B. Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Period 45. CORRECT THE TEST (No2) I. AIMS. 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson, Ss will be to correct the mistakes in their tests. - Vocabulary: - Grammar: 2. Skills: - Practice doing exercises 3. Attitude: - Like subject and more consciousness in learning English. II.TEACHING AIDS. 1. Teacher: Text book, plan. 2. Students: Text books, notebooks, pens. III. PROCEDURES. 1. Check the old lesson. - No check 2. New lesson: Introduce the new lesson. (1’) Teacher’ activities I.Warm up (4’) - Ask ss some questions. How are you today? Are you worry about your test? Is good or bad ? II. Presentation (37’) - Remark the written test + Total: + Good: + Fair: + Poor: - Pay & correct the test.. Ss’ activities - Listen answer.. Contents. and. - Listen to the teacher. - Look at the test & correct. 1. Remark the test + Total: + Good: + Fair: + Poor: 2. Correct the test..

(120) I. Listening - Read the listening again to ss check the answer - Give correct answer and mark. mistakes . - Listen and check the answer - Write. II. Reading. - Ask ss to read the text and answer again.. - Read again. - Correct mistakes. - Correct. III. Language focus. - Explain each sentences and say reason choosing. - Give correct answer. - Listen and correct - Write. IV. Writing - Guide ss to write sentences about themselves - Give correct answer. - Rewrite - Listen.. I. Listen: 1. farmer 2. laid 3. golden 4. wanted 5. cut II. Read: Read the paragraph and answer the questions 1. F 2. T 3. T 4. F 5. F III. Language focus : Choose the best answer 1. B 2. C 3. A 4. B IV. Write 1. You should take more exercise. 2.He told me to put it on the top shelf. 3.You should not listen to him.. 3. Consolidation.(2’) - T retell the contents of the lesson. - Ss listen and remember. 4. Homework.(1') - Prepare unit 8: Getting started - Listen and read. ******************************************* Date of prepare: ........................................ Class 8A. Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Class 8B. Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Period 46. Unit 8. COUNTRY LIFE AND CITY LIFE Getting started – Listen and read.

(121) I. AIMS. 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to talk about the country life and the city life 2. Skills: - To Practice discussing, listening and reading comprehension. 3. Attitude: - Understand about culture, people in many countries and love their country. II.TEACHING AIDS. 1. Teacher: Text book, plan, cassette, tape. 2. Students: Text books, notebooks, pens. III. PROCEDURES. 1. Check the old lesson: - No check 2. New lesson: - Introduce the new lesson. (1’) Teacher’ activities I.Warm up (9’) “Getting started” ? Are you living in the city or in the country? ? Have you ever been to city? - Use 2 pictures in the city and in the country and discuss the different between city life and country life. The words in the box help you. - Call on ss answer - Correct II. Presentation (32’) - We’ve made a list of words about the country and city. Now you listen to the tape between Hoa and Na then find out new words - Read and introduces some new words. Ss’ activities. Contents I. Getting started. - Listen and answer - Look at and disscuss in groups - Answer - Copy down. - Listen. City. Country. -Noisy/busy - closed - tall building - kinds of goods entertaiment - traficjam - polution - crowded ..... - quiet - friendly - house - fresh food - fresh air - harvest - boring ....... II. Listen and read.. - Listen and copy * New words. down - relative (n): - permanently (adv): - peaceful (adj): - remote (adj): - Ask ss to practice new words - Practice - facility (n): - province (n):.

(122) - Call on some practice reading - Guide ss to read dialogue - Explain grammar: + Present progressive to talk about the change + Comparative + Present perfect tense.. - Ask ss to read again and answer the questions - Asks some pairs to practice - Correct. III. Practice - Asks ss to translate in to Vietnamese. - Corrects - Ask ss to prasctice in groups of five talk about like and dislike living in the city and the country - Ask ss to change the card with other group. - Read in chorus. - accessible (adj): - offer (v): - not only...but also: - Work in pairs 1. Practice the dialogue with a partner - Listen and copy * Grammar down + The present progressivetense to talk about change. Ex: Many remote areas are getting electricity. + Comparative Ex: Medical facilities are more easily accessible. + Present perfect tense Ex: Have you been away? I’ve heard it’s a beautiful place - Read and do the 2. Answer the questions task - Practice - Copy down a) Na has been to the countryside / to Kim Lien village b) She was there for the weekend. c) The countryside is peaceful and quiet and there is nothing to do. d) That means there are no library, no movies, no supermarket … to go. e) More remote areas are getting electricity. People can now have things like refrigerators, T.V, medical facilities are more accessible f) Ss’answer - Translate III. Practice - Listen to the teacher - Work in groups Ex: I like living in the city because there are many entertainments, beautiful views... - Change card.

(123) - Call on ss tell before class. - Present - Correct. - Correct - Both city life and country life - Listen have advantage and disadvantage wherever you live, the most important thing is to keep our enviroment clean, to be friendly to other people, to help the surroundings... 3. Consolidation.(2’) - T retell the contents of the lesson. - Ss listen and remember. 4. Homework.(1') - Read and translate - Do exercises 1, 2 on pages 49, 50 in workbook. - Read (Unit 8: Speak - Listen). ***************************************** Date of prepare: ............................................... Class 8A. Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Class 8B. Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Period 47. Unit 8. COUNTRY LIFE AND CITY LIFE (Cont’) Speak - Listen I. AIMS. 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson, students’ ll be able to speak the difirences between the countryside and city life, talk about the change in the future. Listening the dialogue and fill in the missing words. 2. Skills: - To practice listening comprehension: filling the missing words to get information. Speaking the difirences between the countryside and city life, talk about the change in the future. 3. Attitude: - Understand about culture, people in many countries and love their country. II. TEACHING AIDS. 1. Teacher: Text book, plan, cassette, tape and picture. 2. Students: Text books, notebooks, pens. III. PROCEDURES. 1. Check the old lesson:(4').

(124) - A student do exercise 1 in workbook. 2. New lesson: Introduce the new lesson. (1’) Teacher’ activities I. Warm up (5’) - Do you prefer the city or country? Why? - Ask ss to write the list of the city and country. - Call on ss answer - Correct II. Presentation (32’) 1. Speak * Pre-speaking ? What do you see in the pictures? - Ask 2 ss to describe 2 pictures p73 in the book. - What you see in the pictures are the city 5 years ago and now. You work in pairs, talking about the changes of the city by comparing two pictures. Use the words in the box.. - Help ss to revise grammar.. * While- speaking - Guide ss practice in pairs Ex: The town is becoming busier - Call on some pairs practice - Correct and give prompt answer. Ss’ activities. Contents. - Listen and answer - Practice in groups - Answer - Correct. I. Speak - Listen and 1. Work with a parter. Look at answer the 2 pictures and talk about - Look at and the changes of the town. The describe words promts in the book may - Listen and help you. prepare + Picture 1: - Traffic: bike, walk - Houses: small - narrow roads - peaceful/ quiet + Picture 2: - Traffic: busy - Tall building s - Car, motobike... - Long and wide roads - Noisy/ dirty - Modern / beautiful.. - Listen and copy * Comparative down - ...short adj-er...+ than... - ....more + long adj + than.. * Be + getting/ becoming + adj => To talk about change - Practice * Answer - Present - Copy down. - The traffic is getting busier - There are more tall buildings and houses - The houses are getting more modern.

(125) * Post- speaking -Asks Ss to practice in pairs, talking about the changes of their hometown - Asks some pairs to practice - Corrects 2. Listen * Pre-listening - Ask ss to look at the pictures p74 - Who is this ? - What are they doing ? - Can you guess what they are talking about ? - Introduce the listening - Asks ss to read and guess filling the gap. * While-listening - Read the dialogue (twice) - Asks ss to compare their result with a partner - Asks some ss to read their answer. - Corrects. - Work in pairs - Practice - Correct. - Look at and answer. - The town is becoming more beautiful - There are more green trees. - The street are becoming larger, cleaner, noisier.. 2. Work with a partner. Talk about changes in your hometown. * Talk about change in your homtown. - There are more tall buildings in my hometown - The roads are wider - It is becoming busier II. Listen. - Listen - Read and guess - Listen and filling the missing words. - Compare - Read - Correct. * Post-listening - Asks ss to practice reading - Work in pairs the conversation - Asks sas to practice making - Practice similar conversation. - Controls and corrects. - Correct. 3. Consolidation (2’) - T retell the contents of the lesson. - Ss listen and remember.. 1. that 3. It’s 5. from 7. week 9. Thursday 11. afternoon 13. my. 2. this 4. Where 6. coming 8. arriving 10. late 12. speak 14. get.

(126) 4. Homework (1') - Make conversation. - Do exercises 4, 5 on page 51 in workbook. - Read and prepare (Unit 8: Read). ********************************************* Date of prepare: …………………… Class 8A. Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Class 8B. Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Period 48. Unit 8. COUNTRY LIFE AND CITY LIFE (Cont’) Read I. AIMS. 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson, students’ ll be able to read a text and complete the summary, getting the information about the country life and the migrants. 2. Skills: - Practice reading a passage, completing the summary and finding the word. 3. Attitude: - Understand about culture, people in many countries and love their country. II.TEACHING AIDS. 1. Teacher: Text book, plan, cassette, tape and second board. 2. Students: Text books, notebooks, pens. III. PROCEDURES. 1. Check the old lesson:(4') - A student do exercise 4 in workbook 2. New lesson: - Introduce the new lesson. (1’) Teacher’ activities I. Warm up (5’) - Do you want to live in the country or in the city ? Why ? - What problem may arise when so many people move to the city?............. II. Presentation (32’) * Pre-reading ? What is the most urgent problem? - Now you work in pairs and dicuss the causes of this. Ss’ activities - Listen and answer (good jobs, get more money...). - Listen and I. Read answer - Discuss in pairs. Contents.

(127) problem. - Introduces some new words. - Ask ss to practice new words.. - Introduces some statement and asks ss to guess true (T) or false (F) * While-reading - We’ve disscussed the main idea of the reading.Now you read it to have further understading of the text. - Read the text twice. - Correct their guessing - Asks ss to read the text again and do exercise 1 - Asks some ss to read their answers - Corrects. - Asks ss to read the text again - Explain meaning of words - Ask ss to do ex2 - Asks some ss to read their answers - Corrects. Introduces the structure * Post-reading. - Listen and copy * New words. down - rural area # urban area (n): - well-paying job (n): - strunggle (n): - strain (v): - increase (v): - overcrowding (n): - pollution (n): - Practice - migrant (n): guessing - typhoon n) : - flood (n) # drought (n): - a part (a): * True or false - Listen and prepare a) Nowadays farmers are moving to the cities to earn their living b) Farmers move to the cities - Listen and read because they hope to earn more money. silently to c) Farmers want to move to checking their the cities because they are guessing. afraid of farming. - Listen d) When farmers move to the cities they don’t have any difficult. a-T b-T c-F d-F - Copy down 1. Complete the summary. - Read the text Use information from the again and do. passage. - Read aloud - Listen and write. - Read - Listen - Do ex2 - Read - Correct and write. 1. leaving 2. home 3. city 4. rural 5. city 6. problems 7. schools 8. hospitals 9. problem 10. world 2. Find the word in the passage that means:. a) rural c) increase e) tragedy. b) plentiful d) strain f) urban.

(128) - Call ss to read the text aloud - Correct pronounciation - Ask ss: ? Are many people going to the cities? ? What do farmer do when they need more money? ? What happens to the families whose perents go and live in the city? - Asks ss to play role (one of their neighbors are going to move to the city, give him some advices). - You should …………… - You shouldn’t ……….. - Controls and corrects. - Read aloud - Answer Yes, they are They go to city .... - Practice. - Correct. 3. Consolidation.(2’) - T retell the contents of the lesson. - Ss listen and remember. 4. Homework.(1') - Read, answer questions, translate the text - Do exercise 7 on page 54 in workbook. - Read and prepare (Unit 8: Write).. Date of prepare: ………………….. Class 8A. Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Class 8B. Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Period 49. Unit 8. COUNTRY LIFE AND CITY LIFE (Cont’) Write I. AIMS. 1. Knowledge.

(129) - By the end of the lesson, students’ ll be able to write the letter to a friend about your neighborhood. 2. Skills - Practice writing a letter to tell about where they live. 3. Attitude - Understand about culture, people in many countries and love their country. II.TEACHING AIDS 1. Teacher: Text book, plan. 2. Students: Text books, notebooks, pens. III. PROCEDURES. 1. Check the old lesson (5') - A student do exercise 7 in workbook. 2. New lesson Introduce the new lesson. (1’) Teacher’ activities Ss’ activities I. Warm up (5’) - Asks some questions - Listen and ? Do you often write letter? answer ? Who do you write for? ? How many parts are there in a personal letter? ? What are they? II. Presentation (32’) * Pre-writing - Asks ss to read the letter in unit 5 again and order the form of an informal letter - Corrects. - We’ve just revised the structure of an informal letter. Today we’ll learn more about the informal latter by writing a letter to a friend telling him or her about your neighborhood. - Asks ss to practice answering the questions - Call on ss answer - Correct. - Read and order - Copy down. - Listen. - Answer the questions - Practice - Listen. Contents. 1. Put the outline for an informal letter in the correct order. + Heading + Writer’s address + Date + Dear + Opening + Body of letter + Closing.

(130) - Guide: Use the given information and the informal letters structure, you write e letter to a friend telling him or her about your neighborhood. * While-writing - Asks ss to write a letter, using the answer - Call on ss to read their letter before class - Corrects. * Post-writing - Corrects their writing, explains how to write. - Listen to the teacher. - Write. 2. Write a letter to a friend about your neighborhood.. - Read aloud - Copy down. - Listen to the teacher.. 3. Consolidation.(2’) - T retell the contents of the lesson.. Lung Cu, Dong Van, Ha Giang December 2nd, 2013 Dear Po, I live in a small town near a river. My family has a small house with a living room, three bedrooms, a kitchen and a bathroom. Outside my window is a small park with trees and flowers. We live near my school so I can walk there. In my neighborhood there is a stadium. On the weekend I sometimes play soccer with my friends. But the thing I like best in my neighborhood is the library near my house. Every afternoon I go there to read books and look for information. Is there a library in your neighborhood? Is there anything interesting? Write to me. I look forward to hearing from you. Love, Na.

(131) - Ss listen and remember. 4. Homework.(1') - Practice writing. - Prepare: "Unit 8: Language focus". ****************************************************** Date of prepare: ……………………. Class 8A. Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Class 8B. Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Period 50. Unit 8. COUNTRY LIFE AND CITY LIFE (Cont’) Language focus I. AIMS. 1. Knowledge - By the end of the lesson, students’ ll be able to review and practice grammars in unit 8 2. Skills - To practice doing exercises. 3. Attitude - Understand about culture, people in many countries and love their country. II. TEACHING AIDS 1. Teacher: Text book, plan, second board. 2. Students: Text books, notebooks, pens. III. PROCEDURES 1. Check the old lesson - No check 2. New lesson - Introduce the new lesson. (1’) Teacher’ activities Ss’ activities I. Warm up (4’) - Ask ss some questions. - Listen and Who is the best student in your answer class? Who is the tallest / shortest person in your class? Who is funest person ? - Introduce the lesson - Listen to the teacher II. Revision (10’) - Ask ss to repeat the form and - Listen and the use of the present repeat progressive. Contents. I. Revision 1. Present progressive tense. + To talk about the future.

(132) + To talk about the future + To show changes with get and become - Listen to ss and write on the board - Ask ss to make examples - Correct - Ask ss to repeat the form of comparative and superative adjectives - Listen to ss and write on the board - Ask ss to make example - Correct III. Practice (27’) - Asks ss to look at ex1 on page 77 and shipping information - Explain some words in table - Have ss to practice the dialogues - Ask ss to make similar dialogues using the shipping information - Call on some pairs to practice - Corrects. - Explains how to do exercise 2 - Asks ss to do exercise 2 - Asks some pairs to practice - Controls and corrects. Eg: The boat from Hanoi is arriving at 4.00 pm The train to Hue is leaving at - Answer and 7.30 am copy down + To talk about the change with - Make examples get / become + adj - Correct Eg: The town is becoming busier - Repeat 2. Comparative and superative + Comparative: .....short adj - er + than... - Answer and ....more + long adj + than.... copy down + Suprerative: - Make examples ......the + short adj -est ... - Correct ......the most long adj....... - Look at and listen. II. Exercises Exersice 1: Page 77. - Listen - Practice in pairs (2 pairs) - Listen and practice - Practice (4 pairs) - Correct. - Listen - Do ex2 - Practice - Correct. a). A: Is the boat to Quy Nhon leaving at 11.30? B: Is that Good Fortune? A: That’s right B: I’m very sorry,but it’s been delayed. A: Oh, no! B: Now, it’s leaving at 13.55 b). A: Is the boat from Ho Chi Minh city arriving at 10.40? B: Are you talking about Speed of light? A: Yes. B: I’m sorry, but it’s been delayed A: Oh, no! B: Now, it’s arriving at 12.30 Exercise 2:Complete the dialogues. b) We are doing homework.

(133) - Explains how to do exercise 3 - Asks ss to do exercise 3 - Asks some ss to practice. - Listen. - Controls and corrects. - Do ex3 - Read the answer - Correct. - Asks ss to do exercise 4 - Asks some pairs to practice. - Listen - Practice. - Controls and corrects. - Correct. - Asks ss to do exercise 5. - Listen and do ex - Practice - Correct. - Asks some pairs to practice - Controls and corrects. c) I am watching a program on rainforests d) I am practicing my violin lesson e) Mom and I are cleaning the house f) I am having a meeting that afternoon Exercise 3: Complete the sentences.Use the verb & adj in the boxes b) The old men are getting weak c) We should go home. It is getting dark d) The weather is cold e) The students are becoming better f) The school yard is becoming cleaner Exercise 4: Comparisions between the city and the country. - The air in the countryside is fresher than in the city - The traffic in the city is busier than in the countryside. - Food in the city is more expensive than in the country ......... Exercise 5: Compare the house, villa and the arpartment. The apartment is smallest The apartment is the cheapest The villa is the most expensive ……….. 3. Consolidation.(2’) - T retell the contents of the lesson. - Ss listen and remember. 4. Homework.(1') - Do the exercises again - Make sentences - Review all grammars. ********************************************.

(134) Date of prepare: ……………………….. Class 8A. Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Class 8B. Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Period 51. REVISION I. AIMS 1. Knowledge - To review some basic structures, vocabulary and practice. - Vocabulary: - Grammar: Revision + Tenses: Present simple, future tense with be going to + (not) adjective + enough + to-infinitive + Past simple tense. 2. Skills - To practice doing exercises. 3. Attitude - Like subject and more consciousness in learning English. II. TEACHING AIDS 1. Teacher: Text book, plan, second board. 2. Students: Text books, notebooks, pens. III. PROCEDURES 1. Check the old lesson - No check 2. New lesson - Introduce the new lesson. (1’) Teacher’s activities I.Warm up (4') - Ask ss some questions. ? How are you today? ? What ‘s the weather like today? ? Did you prepare the old lesson?. Ss’ activites. Contents. - Answer the questions. II. Revision (10') - Asks ss to repeat some basic - Repeat grammar structures + Tenses: Present simple + (not) adjective + enough + toinfinitive + Past simple tense. + Be going to - Listen and. I. Revision. 1. Present simple tense. + To talk about general truths Eg: Cats eat mice He has short hair + Present tense with future meaning..

(135) copy down. III. Practice (28') - Introduces some exercises on the sub board and asks ss to practice. Ex1: Combine these pairs of sentences, using "enough to": 1. Quang is not strong. He can't move that box. 2. The shoes are big. Mai can wear them 3. The ice isn’t thick. We can’t walk on it. 4. She is 14 years old. She can't get married. - Call some students read their answers and correct if there is any mistake.. Eg: When do they collect and empty garbage? 2. (not) adjective + enough + to-infinitive Eg:That bag is not big enough to carry everything 3. Past simple tense. + To talk about past action Eg: What did you do last night? I did my homework. 4. Be going to V-infi Eg:I’m going to see a movie. - Listen and do II. Exercises. exercises - Do exercise 1 Ex1: Combine these pairs of sentences, using "enough to":. - Answer and write down.. - Do ex 2 Ex2: Underline the correct answer in th brackets. 1. Can you record that program for me? (I’m going to / I’ll) have a bath 2. Nam isn’t upstairs. He’s (sideout / outside) 3. I can’t find my pen. -Yes. OK (I’m going to / I’ll). 1. Quang is not strong enough to move that box. 2. The shoes are big enough to wear them 3. The ice isn’t thick enough to walk on it. 4. She is not old enough to get married. Ex2: Underline the correct answer in th brackets.

(136) help you look for it. 4. Lan has a ticket . She (is going to / will) see a movie. 5. Can I (leave / live) a message for Mr. Cuong? - Call some students read their answers and correct if there is any mistake.. - Answer and write down.. Ex3: Complete these sentense - Do ex 3 using correct form of verb. 1. Ha (be) .... happy when she ( receive) ..... a letter from her friend this morning. 2. The moon (move) ...... around the earth. 3. In my country, it (not rain) ..... much in the winter. 4. Where ... you (spend)....your summer holiday last year? - Call some students read their - Answer and answers and correct if there is write down. any mistake.. * Key: 1. I’m going to 2. outside 3. I’ll 4. is going 5. leave Ex3: Complete these sentense using correct form of verb 1. was - received 2. moves 3. doesn’t rain 4. did you spend. 3. Consolidation (2') - Repeat the basic structures in the lesson. 4. Home work (1') - Learn by heart sructures. - Make sentences. - Redo exercises in workbook. ************************************************ Date of prepare: ……………………….. Class 8A. Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Class 8B. Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Period 52. REVISION (Cont’) I. AIMS 1. Knowledge - To review some basic structures, vocabulary and practice. - Vocabulary: Revision.

(137) - Grammar: Revision + Modals + Reported speech + Present progressive tense + Present perfect tense + Used to + V- inf 2. Skills - To practice doing exercises. 3. Attitude - Like subject and more consciousness in learning English. II. TEACHING AIDS 1. Teacher: Text book, plan, second board. 2. Students: Text books, notebooks, pens. III. PROCEDURES 1. Check the old lesson - No check 2. New lesson - Introduce the new lesson. (1’) Teacher’s activities I. Warm up (2') - Ask ss some questions ? Did you prepare the old lesson? ? How do you feel today? ? Do you likelearning English?. Ss’ activites. Contents. - Answer the questions. II. Revision:(15') - Asks ss to repeat some basic - Repeat. Listen grammar structures: and copy down + Modals + Reported speech + Used to + V- inf + Present progressive tense + Present perfect tense. I. Revision. 1. Modals - Must / have to => Obligation - Should / ought to => Advice - May / can / could =>Use in asking for favors 2. Reported speech + Command & request: S + asked / told + O + to infi + Advice: S + said +O + should +V –infi 3. Used to +V-infi => Past habit Eg: I used to live in the country (Now I don’t live there) 4. Present progressive tense * Use: Express an action happening at the moment.

(138) Eg: The boat to Ha Noi is leaving at 10 o’clock 5. Present perfect tense + Use: To talk about an action in past has result now. (Often going with already, just, ever, yet). Since + point of time For + a period of time + Form: (+) S + have / has + VpII (-) S + have / has + not + VpII (?) Have / has + S + VpII? Yes, S + have / has No, S + have / has + not Wh + have / has + S + VpII. III. Practice:(25') - Introduces some exercises on the board and asks ss to practice Ex1: Write the following sentences in reported speech. 1. “Please lend me your dictionary, Minh” said Nam. 2. “Can you switch off the television ?” Mr. Quang said to Nam. 3. “You should practice speaking English every day” the teacher said. - Call some students read the answers and correct if there is any mistake. Ex2: What should these people do? Give advice. 1. Minh had bad marks in Math last semester 2. Nga is putting on weight. Eg: I have lived in HG since 1989 Hoa has been to Ha Noi for 2 days How long have you lived here? II. Exercises. - Listen and do exercises - Do exercise 1. Ex1. Write the following sentences in reported speech.. -Answer. - Read aloud and write.. - Do ex 2. 1. Nam asked Minh to lend his dictionary. 2. Mr. Quang asked Nam to switch off the T.V 3. The teacher said I should practice speaking English everyday. Ex2: What should these people do? Give advice..

(139) 3. Binh often comes to school late beacuse he gets up late. - Call some students read the answers and correct if there is - Read aloud and write. any mistake. Ex3: Put the verbs in the bracket in to present simple or present progressive. 1. Hoa ......her perents once a year (visit) 2.......Nam...to Ha Long on his birthday? (go) 3. What ...you ..on your birthday? (do) - Call some students do on the board and correct if there is any mistake. Ex4: Complete the sentences. Use present perfect. 1. How long you (know) ........ Mrs. Chi? - I (know) ........ her for five years. 2. We (not see) ...... her since we were on holiday in Ha Long 3. Huong (not finish)...... her homework yet. - Call some ss go to the board to do the task - Correct.. - Do ex 3. - Do as teacher requested. Then copy down. - Do as teacher requested.. - Do the task - Write down.. 1. You should work hard 2. You shouldn’t eat candy. You should be on diet 3. You should go to bed early Ex3: Put the verbs in the bracket in to present simple or present progressive.. 1. visits; 2. Is Nam going 3. are you doing; 4. is becoming Ex4. Complete the sentences. Use present perfect.. 1. have you kown - have known 2. have not seen 3. has not finished. 3. Consolidation (2') - Basic structures in the lesson 4. Home work (1') - Learn by heart structures - Do more exercises in workbook and prepare for the first term test. Date of prepare: ……………………….. Class 8A. Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Class 8B. Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Period 53.

(140) THE FIRST TERM TEST I. AIMS 1. Knowledge - Students can practice about grammar structures, vocabulary they have learnt in the first term. 2. Skills - To practice doing exercises. 3. Attitude - Like subject and more consciousness in learning English. II. TEACHING AIDS 1. Teacher: Tests 2. Students: Pens and papers. *********************************************. Date of prepare: ……………………….. Class 8A. Date: ……………………… Preriod timetable: ……Total: …. Out: …… Class 8B. Date: ……………………… Preriod timetable: ……Total: …. Out: …… Period 54. CORRECT THE FIRST TERM TEST I. AIMS. 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson, Ss will be to correct the mistakes in their tests. - Vocabulary: - Grammar: 2. Skills: - Practice doing exercises 3. Attitude: - Like subject and more consciousness in learning English. II.TEACHING AIDS. 1. Teacher: plan, ss’ tests 2. Students: School things.

(141) III. PROCEDURES. 1. Check the old lesson.(4’) - A student do exercise 3 in workbook. 2. New lesson. - Introduce the new lesson. (1’) Teacher’s activities I.Warm up (2’) - Ask ss some questions. How are you today? Are you worry about your test? Is good or bad ? II. Presentation (35’) - Remark the written test + Total: + Good: + Fair: + Poor: - Pay & correct the test.. I. Choose the best answer - Read the sentences & check the answer - Give correct answers and marks. Ss’ activities. Contents. - Answer the questions. - Listen to the teacher. - Look & correct mistakes . - Read and check the answer - Write. II. Supply the correct form of verbs - Ask ss to read the - Read again sentences and answer again. - Correct mistakes - Correct. 1. Remark the test + Total: + Good: + Fair: + Poor: 2. Correct the test.. I. Choose the best answer 1. c 2. b 3. a 4. b 5. a 6. b 7. d 8. d. II. Supply the correct form of verbs 1. recycling 2. finish 3. took III. Reading 4. hasn’t rained - Ask ss to read the text and - Read and correct III. Reading answer again. Read the following passage - Write and answerthe questions - Correct mistakes 1. He lives in a house near the sea..

(142) IV. Writing - Guide ss to write sentences about themselves. - Rewrite. - Give correct answers. - Listen.. V. Supply the correct form of the words in the blanks to complete the sentences. - Read the sentences again and answer - Correct.. - Do the task - Copy down. 2. It’s about 100 years ago. 3. There are two bedrooms in his house. 4. The bathroom is downstairs next to the kitchen. 5. Yes, there is 6. He likes the view from his bedroom window best. IV. Writing Rewrite the following sentences. 1. Lan asked her friend to lend her a pen for a moment. 2. We have studied English for 5 years. 3. The ladder wasn’t long enough to reach the window. 4. Miss Jackson told Tim that he should do his test carefully. V. Supply the correct form of the words in the blanks to complete the sentences. 1. beautifully 2. interested. 3. Consolidation.(2') - T repeat the main content of the lesson. 4. Homework.(1’) - Prepare new lesson: Unit9. A1 *********************************************** Date of prepare: ……………………….. Class 8A. Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Class 8B. Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Period 55. Unit 9. A FIRST - AID COURSE Getting started - Listen and read.

(143) I. AIMS. 1. Knowledge - By the end of the lesson, students’ ll be able to talk about the first-aid and know how to do in these situations. - Vocabulary: Emergency, ambulance, conscious, hit, bleed, wound, awake..... - Grammar: Making requests, offers, promises 2. Skills: - To practice discussing, listening and reading comprehension. 3. Attitude: - Understand about culture, people in many countries and love their country. II.TEACHING AIDS. 1. Teacher: Text book, plan, casette, tape, picture. 2. Students: Text books, notebooks, pens. III. PROCEDUCES. 1. Check the old lesson: - No check 2. New lesson: Introduce the new lesson. (1’) Teacher’ activities I. Warm up (15’) “Getting started” - Have you ever had an accident requires first-aid? - Have you ever met any situations? - What did you do at that time? - Explains, introduces the pictures and situation. Discuss what would you do in these situations: (1) A girl has a burn on her arm (2) A boy has a bad cut on his leg (3) A girl has a nose bleed (4) A boy has a bee sting - Introduces some new words - Read and have them repeat. Ss’ activities - Listen and answer. Contents 1. Getting started What would you do in these situations: (1) A girl has a burn on her arm (2) A boy has a bad cut on his leg (3) A girl has a nose bleed (4) A boy has a bee sting. - Look at the pictures and practice in groups. - Listen and copy down - Listen and repeat.. a. New words. - towel: khăn - ointment: thuốc mỡ - bandage: băng - handkerchief: khăn tay.

(144) - Controls and corrects. II. Presentation (26’) - Introduces the situation and some guiding questions. - Who are talking in the conversation? - Where are they? - What happened? Why? - Where is the school? - Read the conversation - Give correct answers - Introduces some new words in the dialogue. - Read the dialogue again - Asks some pairs to practice reading. - Correct then asks students to read again and do exercise 2: Select the topics covered in the dialogue - Asks some students to read their answers. - Correct. - Listen. - Listen and answer the questions. - cotton balls: cuộn băng - tiger balm: dầu con hổ - ice bag: túi đá - alcohol: cồn b. Answers: (1) I’ll put the burn under cold water and wash it. I apply some ointment... (2) I’ll wash the cut with alcohol and cover it with a bandage. I’ll take him to the nearnest clinic. (3) I’ll try to stop her nose bleeding by letting her stand straight and raise her head behind.Then I cover it with the cotton ball. (4) I’ll wash and put some meat tenderizer on a handkerchief..... 2. Listen and read. - Listen - Listen - Listen and copy a. New words. down - emergency(n): ca cấp cứu - ambulance (n): xe cứu thương - conscious(adj): còn tỉnh - cover the wound: che vết thương - Listen and - hold it tight: giữ chặt practice reading - fall asleep: ngủ thiếp đi >< keep - Practice in pairs a wake - Read the dialogue again and do ex2 - Read - Correct. b. Select the topics covered in the dialogue. a) describing the condition of the injured person b) asking for the address c) asking the condition of the injured person.

(145) - Introduces how to make a request, offer and promise. - Asks students to practice in pairs to make a similar conversation - Corrects. e) giving first-aid instructions f) arranging for an ambulance - Listen and copy c. Grammar down - Can you tell me what happened? - Will you hurry? => Request - I promise I’ll keep her a wake => Promise - Practice in pairs - Listen to the teacher.. 3. Consolidation.(2’) - T retell the contents of the lesson. - Ss listen and remember. 4. Homework.(1') - Read and translate the dialogue. - Do exercise 1 on page 55 in workbook. - Read (Unit 9: Speak ). ************************************************** Date of prepare: ………………………… Class 8A. Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Class 8B. Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Period 56. Unit 9. A FIRST - AID COURSE (Cont’) Speak I. AIMS. 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson, students continued talk about the first-aid course and know how to do in these situations. - Vocabulary: - Stretcher, crutches, wheelchair, scale, eye chart, patient, paramedic, lean against... - Grammar: Revision expression. - Can / Could you ……….? - May I …….? - I promise I will … 2. Skills: - To practice listening to match the letters, speaking about requests, offers and promises..

(146) 3. Attitude: - Know more about culture, people in many countries and love their country. II.TEACHING AIDS. 1. Teacher: Text book, plan, casette, tape. 2. Students: Text books, notebooks, pens. III. PROCEDUCES. 1. Check the old lesson:(4') - A student do exerise 1 in workbook. 2. New lesson: Introduce the new lesson. (1’) Teacher’ activities I. Warm up (5’) “Networks” - Explains and asks students to practice - Controls and corrects. Ss’ activities - Play game in groups - Listen. Contents nose bleed. beesting. First-aid situations II. Presentation (32’) * Pre-speaking - In the first semester, we’ve learned about the requests, respones. Today we’ll use the stuctures in first-aid course - Introduces the structures in the book. - Listen to the teacher. I. Speak.. - Listen and copy 1. Requests: (đề nghị được giúp down đỡ) - Can / Could you......? - Will / Would you....? + Responses: - Sure / OK / All right - I’m sory, I can’t / I’m afraid not 2. Offers:( đưa ra đề nghị giúp đỡ) - Would you like...? - What can I get for you? - Shall I.....? - Will / Won’t you have...? - Can I get you...? + Responses. - Yes, please / That would be nice. - No, thank you..

(147) - Make examples * While-speaking - Asks students to practice in pairs, using the pictures and the structures - Let students study the pictures and discuss what people in the pictures need ? What would you say in this situation? How would the boy respond to it? - Asks some pairs to practice (5 pairs) - Corrects. * Post-speaking - Asks ss to practice in pairs to make real dialogue. Eg: A boy is thirsty - Your mother wants you to turn on the light - Your friend wants you open the door for him.... - Controls and corrects.. 3. Promises. (Lời hứa) - I will.... I promise. - I promise. I will / won’t...... - I promise to.......... + Responses - I hope so / Good / I’m glad. - Make examples - Don’t forget. Eg: I promise I’ll work hard. I hope so - Listen and prepare. 4. Practice. b) S1: Shall I get you some - Look at the medicine? pictures and S2: Yes, please / That would answer be nice / No, I’m fine c) S1: Can you get me some bandage? S2: Sure - Practice in pairs d) S1: Would you like me to get (5 pairs) you some medicine? - Listen and S2: That would be nice write e) S1: I promise I won’t play soccer in the house again. S2: I hope so / Don’t forget - Practice in pairs. - Correct. 3. Consolidation.(2’) - T retell the contents of the lesson. - Ss listen and remember. 4. Homework.(1') - Do exercises 2, 3 in workbook. - Read and prepare (Unit 9: Listen)..

(148) Date of prepare: ………………………… Class 8A. Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Class 8B. Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Period 57. Unit 9. A FIRST - AID COURSE (Cont’) Listen I. AIMS. 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson, students will be able to listen to match the letters. - Vocabulary: Stretcher, crutches, wheelchair, scale, eye chart, patient, paramedic, lean against... - Grammar: 2. Skills: - To practice listening to match the letters 3. Attitude: - Know more about culture, people in many countries and love their country. II.TEACHING AIDS. 1. Teacher: Text book, plan, casette, tape. 2. Students: Text books, notebooks, pens. III. PROCEDUCES. 1. Check the old lesson:(5') - A student do exerise 2 in workbook. 2. New lesson: Introduce the new lesson. (1’) Teacher’ activities Ss’ activities I. Warm up (2’) - Ask ss some questions: - Listen and Who is absent today? answer questions How are you today? What is the weather like today? II. Presentation (33’) * Pre-listening - Ask students to look at the pictures on page 82 and answer Where are they?. - Look at the pictures and answer. Contents. I. Listen.

(149) What are they doing? - Introduces some new words and write on the board - Asks students to guess matching.. * While-listening -You are going to listen to a talk descibing the picture you listen and match the letter to the correct words then put them in the correct order you hear. - Open to the CD. - Asks students to compare their results with a partner - Asks some students to read their answers. - Corrects - Read again to correct: - Have them put in correct order * Post-listening - Asks students to practice “Rub out and remember” with new words they’ve learned - Controls and corrects. stretcher crutches Wheelchair scale eye chart patient paramedic lean against. - Listen and copy 1. New words down and read - Guess matching - stretcher (n): cái cáng - crutches (n): Cái nạng - wheelchair (n): Xe lăn - scale (n): Cái cân - eye chart (n): Bảng đo thị lực - patient (n): Bệnh nhân - paramedic (n): Phụ tá - Listen and 2. Match the letters with prepare words. - Listen & match - Compare - Read. A. Ambulance B. Wheelchair - Correct C. Crutches - Listen and D. Eye chart check E. Scale F. Stretcher - Do as requested 3. Put them in correct order F, B, D, A, E, C - Play game. - Listen. 3. Consolidation.(3’) - T retell the contents of the lesson. - Ss listen and remember. 4. Homework.(1') - Make conversation. - Do exercises 6 in workbook. - Read and prepare (Unit 9: Read)..

(150) Date of prepare: …………………………. Class 8A. Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Class 8B. Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Period 58. Unit 9. A FIRST - AID COURSE (Cont’) Read I. AIMS. 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson, students can read about the first - aid course and know how to do in these situations. - Vocabulary: - Fainting, patient, evelate, lower, revise, minimize.... - Grammar: - So as to / in order to 2. Skills: - To practice reading the shorts passages and choosing a correct case for each of the following treatments. 3. Attitude: - Know more about culture, people in many countries and love their country. II.TEACHING AIDS. 1. Teacher: Text book, plan. 2. Students: Text books, notebooks, pens. III. PROCEDUCES. 1. Check the old lesson:(5') - A student write new words. 2. New lesson: Introduce the new lesson. (1’) Teacher’ activities I. Warm up (4’) “Find someone who” - Draw the table on the board - Asks students to practice - Controls and corrects Did you have a …..? Who ......... Nose bleed Bad cut Burn Bee sting II. Presentation (32’) * Pre-reading - Ask students to make a list of first-aid situations you have learnt - Now you work in groups and discuss (5 minutes) what should we do in these situations: (Lable. Ss’ activities - Play game - Practice - Listen. - Practice - Discuss in groups. Contents.

(151) the pictures to students discuss) + Fainting + Shock + Burn - Introduces some new words to students discuss. - Ask students to practice * While-reading - Read the reading (twice) - Asks students to read the text - Controls and corrects - Asks students to read the text again and choose the correct case for each of the following treatments - Ask some students to read their answers - Corrects. - Introduces the structures and words in reading. 1. New words - Listen and copy - Lying flat: Nằm thẳng down - Elevate: Nâng # Lower : Hạ - Revive: Tỉnh lại - Victim: Nạn nhân - Cool the burn: Làm mát vết bỏng - Minimize tissue damage: - Answer Giảm tối đa sự hỏng các mô - Ease the pain: Giảm vết đau - Sterile: Vô trùng 2. Choose a correct case for - Listen and read each of the following silently. treatments. - Read aloud - Listen - Practice - Read - Correct. - Listen and practice. A: (Fainting) a) The victim should not sit or stand c) The victim’s head should be below the level of your heart. e) The victim should drink a cup of tea when reviving. B (Shock) b) Victim can not drink wine or beer C (Burn) d) You should ease the pain with ice or cold water parks 3. Grammar. - Force sb to do smt: Bắt ai đó làm gì - Let sb do smt: Để ai đó làm gì (+) Commands Eg: Leave the patien lying flat Don’t force him to sit or stand (+) In order to / so as to (Perpose) Eg: Cool the burn immediatly so as to / in order to minimize.

(152) tissue damage * Post-reading True / False Repetition Drill Eg: If some one is fainted we should..... - Ask students to practice - Controls and corrects 1. If some one is fainted we should not give him any tea when he revives 2. If some one is fainted we have to make him sit or stand. 3. ……... - Listen - Practice in groups. - Listen. 3. Consolidation.(2’) - T retell the contents of the lesson. - Ss listen and remember. 4. Homework.(1') - Read and translate the text - Do exercise 5 on page 57 in workbook. - Read and prepare (Unit 9: Write).. Date of prepare: …………………………… Class 8A. Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Class 8B. Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Period 59. Unit 9. A FIRST - AID COURSE (Cont’) Write I. AIMS..

(153) 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson, students can write the letter to give the thanks. - Vocabulary: Cheer up, come over / out, bored... - Grammar: Structure of an informal letter 2. Skills: - To practice writing the letter to give the thanks. 3. Attitude: - Know more about culture, people in many countries and love their country. II.TEACHING AIDS. 1. Teacher: Text book, plan, secondboard. 2. Students: Text books, notebooks, pens. III. PROCEDUCES. 1. Check the old lesson:(4') - A student do exercise 1 in workbook. 2. New lesson: Introduce the new lesson. (1’) Teacher’ activities Ss’ activities I. Warm up (5’) - Asks some questions - Listen and Has someone ever given you answer. a gift? How did you feel at that time? What did you do to thank him? ……… II. Presentation (32’) * Pre-writing - In daily life, we usually write thank-notes to relatives and friends. In this lesson, we’ll learn how to write a thank-you letter - Asks students to read the thank-you note Nga sent to Hoa after she left the hospital on page 84. - Explain some new words. - Ask ss to complete the letter use the correct tense forms of the verbs in brackets.. - Listen to the teacher. Contents. 1. Complete thank-you note.. - Read the letter. - Listen and copy a. New words. down - cheer sb up (v): vui mừng - bored (adj): - come over (v): - come out (v): - Listen and b. Complete the thank-note complete the letter.

(154) - Asks some students to read the completed note. - Corrects - Now you write a letter to a friend to express you thanks for what he / she has done for you. In this letter you invite your friend to go on a picnic with you and you arrange to contact your friends. Answer questions in the book p85 - Guide ss to anwer the questions * While-writing - Asks students to practice writing base on answers (Go around classroom to help students) - Ask students to compare with a partner - Asks some students to read their writing. - Corrects. * Post-writing - Asks students use the same format to write another note to another friend for other occasions. - Read - Correct - Listen and answer the questions. 1. was 3. helped 5. am. 2. were 4. came 6. will phone. - Listen to the 2. Write a thank - note to a teacher friend. - Practice writing - Compare - Read - Correct. - Practice. Dear Na, I’d like to say thank you for the interesting book you gave me on my birthday last weekend. It is a wonderful book about Vietnamese history. It helped to make my day much more meaningful. This week I have much more free time, and my family has decide to go on a picnic to my home village on Saturday. Why don’t you join us? We will be very happy to have you along. I will phone you tonight for details. I love to see you then. Your friend, Po 3.Write another letter to another friend..

(155) - Asks some students to read their note - Corrects. - Read - Correct. Dear Ly, I have asked some friend of our old class to come over my house for a class gathering next weekend. It falls on October 2. I hope you will be able to come. I am sure that we will have a lot of fun. We are looking forward to seeing you. Yours Sung. 3. Consolidation.(2’) - T retell the contents of the lesson. - Ss listen and remember. 4. Homework.(1') - Practice writing a letter to your friend or relatives. - Read "Unit 9: Language focus".. Date of prepare: ………………………… Class 8A. Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Class 8B. Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Period 60. Unit 9. A FIRST - AID COURSE (Cont’) Language focus I. AIMS. 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson, students’ ll be able to review and practice the structure: so as to/ in order to, will in a polite requests / offer / promises. 2. Skills: - To practice doing exercise, speaking, writing and reading 3. Attitude: - Know more about culture, people in many countries and love their country..

(156) II. TEACHING AIDS. 1. Teacher: Text book, plan. 2. Students: Text books, notebooks, pens. III. PROCEDUCES. 1. Check the old lesson: - No check 2. New lesson: Introduce the new lesson. (1’) Teacher’ activities I. Warm up (4’) Pelmanism - Explains how to do then asks students to practice. - Controls and corrects. do - done play -played meet - met cut -cut teach - taught see - seen II Revision (10’) - Asks students to repeat the form and the use of the structures + In order to/ so as to + Future simple + Polite requests / offers / promises. Ss’ activities. Contents. - Practice in groups - Listen to the teacher. - Repeat and coppy down. III. Practice (27’) - Asks students to do exercise 1: - Practice Match one part of a sentence from column A with another part in column B. Then write a. I. Revision. 1. In order to/ so as to => Perpose Eg: I went to Hanoi in order to meet my grandmother. She gets up early so as to go to school on time 2. Future simple - Using: To express an action will happen. Eg: He will be here on time. Will you go to with Lan this afternoon? 3. Modal will to make polite requests / offers / promises - Will you answer the telephone, please? --> Request - I’ll paint the door this afternoon. --> Offer - I promise. I’ll study harder. II. Exercises. Exercise 1: 2-c. Mary wrote a notice on the board in order to inform.

(157) complete sentence by using in order to/ so as to - Asks some students to practice - Corrects. - Explains how to do exercise 2 - Asks students to do exercise 2 - Asks some pairs to practice - Controls and corrects - Explains how to do exercise 3 - Asks students to do exercise 3 - Asks some students to practice - Controls and corrects. - Asks students to do exercise 4 - Asks some pairs to practice - Controls and corrects. - Practice in groups - Listen and write down. her classmates about the change in schedule 3-b. Mr. Green got up early this morning so as to get to the meeting on time 4-e. My elder brother studies hard this year in order to pass the entrance exam to the university. 5-a. People use the first-aid in order to ease the victim’s pain and anxiety. 6-d. You should cool the burn s immediately in order to minimize tissue damage. Exercise2:. - Listen. - Practice in pairs - Practice - Listen and 1. will 2. will write down 3. won’t 4. Shall 5. will 6. ‘ll - Listen Exercise 3: - Do exercise - Practice - Listen to the b) Will you give it to me, teacher and write please? c) Will you answer the telephone, please? d) Will you turn on the TV, please? e) Will you pour a glass of water for me, please? f) Will you get me the cushion, please? - Practice in pairs Exercise 4: - Practice (6 pairs) b) Will you paint the door, - Write in your please exercise book Shall I paint the door for you ? c) Will you study harder, please? I'll study harder d) Will you carry bag for me? Shall I carry bag for you? e) Will you hang the washing?.

(158) Shall I hang the washing? f) Will you cut the grass, please? I will cut the grass for you. 3. Consolidation.(2’) - T retell the contents of the lesson. - Ss listen and remember. 4. Homework.(1') - Do the exercises again - Read (Unit 10: Getting started - Listen and read).. Date of prepare: …………………… Class 8A. Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Class 8B. Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Period 61. UNIT 10. RECYCLING Getting started - Listen and read I. AIMS. 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson, students can give directions, introduction and respond. - Vocabulary: Representive,wrap, fertilizer, reduce, recycle, throw.... - Grammar: Model verbs Adjective followed by an infinitive or a noun clause 2. Skills: - Practice listening, reading the dialogue, asking and answering the questions. 3. Attitude: - Have more consciousness in protecting environment. II.TEACHING AIDS. 1. Teacher: Text book, plan, cassette, tape, picture. 2. Students: Text books, notebooks, pens. III. PROCEDUCES. 1. Check the old lesson: - No check 2. New lesson: - Introduce the new lesson. (1’).

(159) Teacher’ activities I. Warm up (7’) “Getting started What do you do to protect the enviroment? - As we know, garbage is an urgent problem in our society we can reduce the amount of garbage to protect enviroment is recycling. - Explains, introduces the pictures and situation. - Controls and corrects. II. Presentation (34’) - Ask students to look at logo on page 89 Which organization does this logo represent? What does this organization do? - Ask students to read introduction What does Friends of the Earth do? - Introduces the dialogue and some guiding questions. Who are talking in the conversation ? Where are they ? What are they talking about? - Correct - Read the dialogue - Introduces some new words. Ss’ activities - Listen and answer - Listen to the teacher. Contents I.Getting started. - Look and practice - Listen to the teacher and write - Should - Shouldn’t down. - We should use cloth bag instead of plastic bag - We shouldn’t buy thing over packed - We should reuse plastic bag - We should use tree leaves to wrap things - We should use paper to make toys. ........ - Look at and answer. II. Listen and read.. - Read - Answer - Listen and answer. - Listen - Listen - Listen and copy 1. New words.

(160) and stuctures. down. - Read the dialogue again. - Listen and read silently - Listen and practice reading - Practice reading. - Read. - Asks some groups to practice reading. - Correct then asks students to read again and do exercise 2 - Asks some students to read their answers. - Correct. - Correct and write down.. - representative (n): Đại diện - wrap (v): gói bọc - fertilizer (n): phân bón - reduce (v): giảm - recycle (v): tái sx - reuse (v): tái sử dụng - over packaged (adj): Được đóng gói quá nhiều - throw (v): vứt - natural resources (n): TNTN 2. Structures + Adjective + to infinitive Eg: It’s not difficult to remember It’s easy for me to do this homework + Adjective + clause Eg: I am pleased that you want to know more. I’m very happy that you passed your exam 3. Answers. a) Reduce means not buying products which are over packed. b) We can reuse things like envelopes, glass and plastic bottles and old plastic bags. c) Recycle means not just throwing things away. Try and find another use for them d) We can look for information on recycling things by having a contact with an organization like Friends of the Earth, going to the local library, or asking your family, friends or scientific society. e) Beacause when we throw them away they could stay very long and could not be self.

(161) destroyed. 3. Consolidation.(2’) - T retell the contents of the lesson. - Ss listen and remember. 4. Homework.(1') - Read and translate the dialogue - Do exercises 1 on pages 58 in workbook. - Prepare new lesson: Unit 10. Speak Date of prepare: …………………………… Class 8A. Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Class 8B. Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Period 62. UNIT 10. RECYCLING (Cont’) Speak I. AIMS. 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson, student will be able to practice speaking which group each item belong to. - Vocabulary: - Grammar: Revision expression. Which group do...belong to? Put them in.... What can we do with...? We can reuse/ recycle.... 2. Skills: - Practice speaking 3. Attitude: - Have more consciousness in protecting environment. II.TEACHING AIDS. 1. Teacher: Text book, plan, cassette, tape. 2. Students: Text books, notebooks, pens. III. PROCEDUCES. 1. Check the old lesson:(5') - A student do exercise 1 in workbook. 2. New lesson: - Introduce the new lesson. (1’) Teacher’ activities I. Warm up (5’) “Hang man” - Explains and asks ss to practice 1. PAPER 2. CLOTHES. Ss’ activities - Practice. Contents “Hang man’’ 1. ……………….. 2. ……………….. 3. ……………….. 4. ………………...

(162) 3. GLASS 4. METAL 5. PLASTIC 6. LEATHER - Controls and correct II. Presentation (30’) * Pre-speaking - Introduces the picture in the book and asks ss to name things in it - Controls * While-speaking - Guide: You have nameed the items in the picture, now you work in pairs and decide which group each item belongs to. - Asks some pairs to practice before class. - Corrects. - Repeat some structures:. * Post-speaking - Asks ss to practice in pairs to make real dialogue. - Controls and corrects.. 5. ……………….. 6. ………………... - Listen.. - Practice in pairs. I. Speak. - Practice in pairs (5 pairs) - Listen to the picture. - Practice. - Listen and write down.. - Listen and write. - Do as teacher requested. - Listen to the teacher.. 3. Consolidation.(3’) - T retell the contents of the lesson. - Ss listen and remember.. - Paper: paper, old/used newspapers, books, notebooks …. - Glass: bottles, glasses… - Plastic: plastic bags, plastic bottles, plastic wares … - Metal: food cans, drink cans, tins ... - Fabric: clothes, pieces of materials … - Leather: shoes, sandals, school bags… - Vegetable matter: fruit peels, vegetables … * Structures: Which group do clothes belong to? Put them in “Fabric” What can we do with those clothes?.

(163) 4. Homework.(1') - Make conversation. - Do exercise 2 on page 60 in workbook. - Read and prepare (Unit 10: Listen). Date of prepare: …………………… Class 8A. Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Class 8B. Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Period 63. UNIT 10. RECYCLING (Cont’) Listen I. AIMS. 1. Knowledge: -To practice listening comprehension: getting information and know how to make a compost heap. - Vocabulary:Compost heap, tealeaves, egg-shells, moisture, condensation, grain, rat - Grammar: 2. Skills: - Practice listening 3. Attitude: - Have more consciousness in protecting environment. II.TEACHING AIDS. 1. Teacher: Text book, plan, cassette, tape. 2. Students: Text books, notebooks, pens. III. PROCEDUCES. 1. Check the old lesson:(5') - A student do exercise 2 in workbook. 2. New lesson: - Introduce the new lesson. (1’) Teacher’ activities I. Warm up (4’) Pelmanism - Explains how to do then asks students to practice. - Controls and corrects. do - done play -played meet - met cut -cut teach - taught see - seen II. Presentation (32’) * Pre-listening - Ask students some questions: Have you ever seen a compost heap?. Ss’ activities. Contents. - Practice in groups - Listen to the teacher. - Listen and answer the questions.. I. Listen.

(164) Do you know how the compost is made? - Ask them to practice in groups discuss the way to make compost. - Introduces some new words. - Practice in groups and discuss. - Listen and write down.. - Read and have them listen and - Listen to the repeat. teacher and repeat after that. - Guide: You are going to listen - Listen to the to an expert talking about the teacher. way to make compost. First, you look at the questions and have a guess of the information in the tape. * While-listening - Turns on the tape (twice) - Listen and - Asks ss to compare their match. results with a partner Compare - Asks some ss to read their - Read aloud answers. - Corrects - Write down -Turns on the tape again to - Listen and correct: check. * Post-listening - Asks ss to arrange the - Listen and do sentences in correct order as teacher request.. - Call them read aloud - Controls and corrects.. - Read - Take note. 1. New words - compost heap (n): - tealeaves (n): - egg-shells (n): - moisture: - condensation: - grain: - rat:. 2. Check (v) the correct answers a) A b) B c) A d) B 1. Use shovels to turn the compost 2. Start a compost heap 3. Water the compost 4. Place in the garden 5. Use as fertilizer 6. Keep for six months * The key: 2 - 4 - 1- 3 - 6 – 5. 3. Consolidation.(3’) - T retell the contents of the lesson. - Ss listen and remember. 4. Homework.(1') - Do exercise 3 on page 60 in workbook. - Read and prepare (Unit 10: Read THE WRITTEN TEST(No4) Time : 15 minutes.

(165) I. Questions. Complete the second sentences so that it has a similar meaning to the first. (10pts) 1. Lan likes visiting her grandfather every week. Lan enjoys ……………………………………………………………………………... 2. I started playing tennis last year. I have …………………………………………………………………………………... 3. The teacher said to Ha: “ Don’t put your legs on the table.” The teacher …………………………………………………………………………….. 4. Someone will translate this letter into Vietnamese. This letter ………………………………………………………………………………. 5. Is it all right if I take a photograph? Would you mind ……………………………………………………………………….. II. Answer and mark Complete the second sentences so that it has a similar meaning to the first. (10pts) ( 2 x 5 = 10pts) Câu Complete the second sentences so that it has a similar meaning to the first. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.. Đáp án Điểm Lan enjoys visiting her grandfather every 2,0 week. I have played tennis for a year / since last 2,0 year. The asked Ha not to put her / his legs on the 2,0 table. This letter will be translate into Vietnamese. 2,0 Would you mind if I took a photograph? 2,0. ************************************************ Date of prepare: ……………………. Class 8A. Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Class 8B. Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Period 64. UNIT 10. RECYCLING (Cont’) Read I. AIMS. 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson, students’ ll be able to read a text and answer the questions, getting the information about recycling. - Vocabulary: - Pipe, floor covering, make from/to, milk man, refill....

(166) - Grammar: - Passive voice 2. Skills: - Practice reading the passage about recycling, asking and answer the questions. 3. Attitude: - Have more consciousness in protecting environment. II. TEACHING AIDS. 1. Teacher: Text book, plan. 2. Students: Text books, notebooks, pens. III. PROCEDUCES. 1. Check the old lesson:(5') - A student do exercise 3 in workbook. 2. New lesson: - Introduce the new lesson. (1’) Teacher’ activities I. Warm up (4’) - Ask students some questions: What do you do with empty bottles? What things do we reuse?. Ss’ activities - Answer the questions. II. Presentation (32’) * Pre-reading - Ask ss to practice in pairs, ask - Listen and and answer these questions: practice in pairs. What can we do with cars tires/ bottles? How can we make it into...? - Introduces some new words - Listen and write, read silently. - Read and have students repeat - Listen and read after that. - Guide: You are going to read an articles in the environmental page of the newspaper. You read and answer the questions in your book. * While-reading - Read the tape (twice).. Contents. - Listen to the teacher.. - Listen to the. I. Read. 1. New words - car tire (n): - throw away (v): - pipe (n): - floor covering (n): - make from/ to: - milk man (n): - melt (v): - law (n): - deposit (n): - wast (n): - dung (n):. 2. Answer.

(167) - Asks students to read the text. - Controls and corrects then asks students to read the text again and do exercise 1. - Asks some students to read their answers. - Corrects. - Introduce the passive form.. - Asks students to read the text again and do exercise 2 - Asks some students to read their answers - Corrects. * Post-reading - Asks students to read the text again and translate into Vietnamese - Controls and corrects if there. teacher. - Read the text - Practice. a) People cleaned and refilled empty milk bottles. b) The glass is broken up, melted and made into new - Read glassware. c) The Oregon government - Listen and copy made a new law that there must be a deposit on drink cans. The deposit is returned when people bring the cans back for recycling. d) Compost is made from household and garden waste e) If we have a recycling story to share we can call or fax the magazine at 5 2665 456. - Listen and copy 3. Grammar. down. (Passive form) - Car tire are thrown away every year. => S + be + VpII - Tires can be recycled to make pipes S + modal + be + PII - Practice 4. Work with partner. Complete the sentences to - Read aloud make a list of recylced things. - Listen and - Car tires are recycled to write make pipes and floor coverings. - Milk bottles are cleaned and refilled - Glass is broken up, melted and made into new glassware - Drink cans are brought back for recycling - Household and garden waste is made into compost - Do as teacher requessted. - Listen to the.

(168) is any mistake. teacher. Date of prepare: ………………………. Class 8A. Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Class 8B. Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Period 65. UNIT 10. RECYCLING (Cont’) Write I. AIMS. 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson, students’ ll be able to know the way to write instructions. - Vocabulary: Soak , bucket , press, wooden spoon, mash, wire mesh , fimly... - Grammar: Passive voice (Revise). Phrasal verbs: put on/ take off/ pull out… 2. Skills: - Practice writing instructions. 3. Attitude: - Have more consciousness in protecting environment. II.TEACHING AIDS. 1. Teacher: Text book, plan. 2. Students: Text books, notebooks, pens. III. PROCEDUCES. 1. Check the old lesson:(4') - A student read the text again. 2. New lesson: - Introduce the new lesson. (1’) Teacher’ activities Ss’ activities I. Warm up (5’) - Guide ss to play game - Play game ‘Sorting out,: Put things in correct groups.. II. Presentation (32’) * Pre-writing - Guide: There are many things - Listen to the that can be recycled. However, teacher not many of us know how these materials are recycleed. In this lesson, we will know how to recycle tea leaves and papers. Contents - Glass bottles, drinking cans, food cans, glass wares, plastic bags/ bottle, book, paper,.... + Glass: + Plastic + Matal. 1. Complete the recycling instructions. Use the verbs in the box. a. Complete 1- use 2 - mix 3 - place 4 - press 5 - wrap.

(169) into new items. - Asks students to read the passage and complete it : - Asks some ss to read the completed note. - Corrects - Introduces some new words - Read and have them repeat - Guide: In some areas people burn dry tea leaves to keep mosquitoes away. Make the directions on how to prepare the tea leaves by using the pictures and given words in the box. * While-writing - Asks ss to practice writing - Asks some ss to read their writing.. - Corrects * Post-writing - Asks ss to write another giving instructions - Asks some ss to read their note - Corrects. 6 - wait. 7 - dry. - Practice - Read - Listen and write down - Take note - Listen and repeat - Listen to the teacher. - Listen and practice - Read - Practice. - Read - Listen and write. b. New words - soak (v): - bucket (n): - press (v): - wooden spoon (n): - mash (v): - wire mesh (n): - firmly (adv): 2. Write the intructions. a) First, take the used tea leaves from the teapot b) Next, scatter the tea leaves on a tray c) Then, dry the leaves in the sun d) Finally, put the dry leaves in apot for future use. 3. Practice. How to make car tires into sandals 1. Remove all dirty subtance 2. Put them into the production line 3. Collect the old tires and put them in reserve 4. Add some necessary matters 5. Melt the types carefully 6. Get the sandals available and introdce them to the market 3 - 5 - 1 - 4 -2 – 6.

(170) 3. Consolidation.(2’) - Teacher retell the contents of the lesson. - Ss listen and remember. 4. Homework.(1') - Do exercises 5, 6 on pages 61, 62 in workbook. - Read "Unit 10 - Language focus". ***************************************************** Date of prepare: ………………………….. Class 8A. Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Class 8B. Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Period 66. UNIT 10. RECYCLING (Cont’) Language focus I. AIMS. 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson, students’ ll be able to review passive forrm, adjectives followed by an infinitive, a noun clause. - Vocabulary: Revision words about environment - Grammar: Passive voice. Adjectives follow by an infinitive or a noun clause. 2. Skills: - Practice reading, writing and doing exercises. 3. Attitude: - Have more consciousness in protecting environment. II.TEACHING AIDS. 1. Teacher: Text book, plan. 2. Students: Text books, notebooks, pens. III. PROCEDUCES. 1. Check the old lesson: - No check 2. New lesson: - Introduce the new lesson. (1’) Teacher’ activities I. Warm up (4’) - Have them play game: Palnisium - Explains how to do then asks ss to practice. - Controls and corrects. II. Revision (7’). Ss’ activities - Play game - Practice in groups - Listen. Contents do - done play - played meet - met cut - cut teach - taught …….

(171) - Asks ss to repeat the form and the use of the structures. III. Practice (30’) - Asks ss to do exercise 1: - Asks some ss to practice - Corrects. - Explains how to do exercise 2 - Asks students to do exercise 2 - Asks some pairs to practice - Controls and corrects. - Repeat.. I. Revision 1. Passive form: + Present of passive S + am / is / are + PII Eg: E is spoken all over the world + Past of passive S + was / were + PII Eg: Truyen Kieu was written by Nguyen Du + Modal of passive S + modal + be + PII Eg: The work will be finished tomorrow 2. Adj + to-infi / a clause Eg: It’s difficult to get job . Mai was happy that she got good mark. - Practice - Practice in groups - Listen and write down. II. Exercises 1. Ex1: b) Then the glass is washed with a detergent liquid c) The glass pieces are dried completely d) They are mixed with certain specific chemicals e) The mixture is melted untill it becomes a liquid ... - Put the picture in correct order a-1; b-4; c-3; d-5; e-2; f-6 2. Ex2:. - Listen. - Practice in pairs - Practice - Listen and 1) It will be shown write down 2) Will it be built ...? 3) but it will be finished ... 4) Will it be made ...? - Explains how to do exercise 3 - Listen 3. Ex3: - Asks students to do exercise 3 - Practice in pairs - Asks some students to - Practice practice 1) It's easy to understand.

(172) - Controls and corrects. - Listen and write down. 2) It's hard to believe 3) It's dangerous to go 4) It's important to wait 4. Ex4:. - Asks students to do exercise 4 - Do exercise - Asks some pairs to practice - Practice - Controls and corrects - Listen and copy 1) was happy down 2) am relieved 3) is afraid 4) Are you sure 5) am certain 3. Consolidation.(2’) - T retell the contents of the lesson. - Ss listen and remember. 4. Homework.(1') - Do the exercises again - Make sentences - Read (Unit 11 - Getting started - Listen and read).. ***************************************************** Date of prepare: ……………………….. Class 8A. Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Class 8B. Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Period 67 Unit 11. TRAVELING AROUND VIET NAM Getting started - Listen and read I. AIMS. 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson, students’ ll be able to express about they are interested in. - Vocabulary: Crop, sugar cane, take a photo, corn.... - Grammar: Request : Would / Do you mind ... ? 2. Skills: - Practice reading and listening the dialogue, checking the boxes. 3. Attitude: - Know more about people, culture, country in many countries which speak English. Then have good attitude about their country. II.TEACHING AIDS. 1. Teacher: Text book, plan, cassette, tape. 2. Students: Text books, notebooks, pens. III. PROCEDUCES. 1. Check the old lesson: - No check.

(173) 2. New lesson: - Introduce the new lesson. (1’) Teacher’ activities I. Warm up (5’) + Networks with famous places in Viet Nam - Controls and corrects II. Presentation (35’) 1. Getting started - Explains, introduces the pictures and situation. - Ask them practice in pairs and give the answers - Call some students give the answers. - Controls and corrects 2. Listen and read - Have them listen to the tape on page 99 - Introduces the situation and some questions. - Who are talking in the conversation? - Where are they now? ...... - Correct. Ss’ activities - Practice in groups. 1. Getting started - Look at the pictures and practice - Do as teacher requested. - Read aloud. a) Ngo Mon Gate b) Nha Rong temple c) The Temple of Literature d) Ha Long Bay. - Listen and write down - Listen to the tape - Listen and answer the questions. - Listen to the teacher - Introduces some new words - Listen and write - Read and guide students read - Introduces some new structures. Contents. - Listen and practice reading - Listen and write down. 2. Listen and read. a. New words - crop (n): - sugar cane (n): - take a photo: - front seat (n): - corn (n): b. New structures. - Would you mind turning on the TV? → Would / Do you mind + Ving? - Would you mind if I closed the door? - Do you mind if I close the door?.

(174) - Asks some groups to practice reading. - Correct then asks students to read again and do exercise 2. - Practice in groups - Practice. - Asks some students to read their answers. - Correct if there is any mistake. - Read aloud. III. Practice - Asks some questions Where does Hoa meet Tim? Who does Tim come to VN with? How long does it take them to get to HN? What do they travel to HN? What does Tim like to do on the way to Ha Noi? - Corrects if there is any mistake.. - Listen and answer. - Listen and answer. → Would you mind if I + V-ed? Do you mind if I + V? c. Practice the dialogue in groups. d. True or false? Check (v) the boxes. Then correct the false sentences and write them in your exercise book. a) T b) T c) F → Not in a bus but in a taxi d) T e) T f) F → Not only rice and but also sugar cans are grown around Ha Noi.. - Listen to the teacher.. 3. Consolidation. (3’) - T to retell the contents of the lesson. - Ss listen and remember. 4. Homework. (1') - Read and translate the dialogue. - Do exercises 1, 2 on page 65 in workbook. - Read (Unit 11: Speak - Listen). ***************************************************** Date of prepare: …………………….. Class 8A.Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Class 8B.Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Period 68 Unit11. TRAVELING AROUND VIET NAM Speak - Listen I. AIMS..

(175) 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson, students’ll be able to know the way to use” Would/ Do you mind...?” to make request and respond. - Vocabulary: Highway, tourist information center... - Grammar: Request: Would / Do you mind...? 2. Skills: - Practice listening the way to show the way, speaking request and reply. 3. Attitude: - Know more about people, culture, countries in many countries which speak English. Then have good attitude about their country. II.TEACHING AIDS. 1. Teacher: Text book, plan, cassette, tape. 2. Students: Text books, notebooks, pens. III. PROCEDUCES. 1. Check the old lesson: - No check 2. New lesson: - Introduce the new lesson. (1’) Teacher’ activities Ss’ activities I. Warm up (5’) “Hang man” - Explains and asks students to - Practice practice 1. MIND 2. CAN 3. REQUEST 4. YOU 5.... - Controls and corrects - Listen to the teacher II. Presentation (35’) 1. Speak: * Pre-speaking - Asks students to repeat the structure and practice changing - Controls. - Practice. * While-speaking. - Asks students to practice in - Practice in pairs, to make and respond the pairs. Contents 1. _ _ _ _ 2. _ _ _ 3. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 4. _ _ _ 5. _ _ _ _ _ _ _. I. Speak - Would / Do you mind + Ving ? - Would you mind if I + V-ed? - Do you mind if I + V? Ex: Can you close the door Ex: Would you explain the exercise for me?.

(176) request. - Asks some pairs to practice - Corrects * Post-speaking. - Asks students to practice in pairs to make conversation - Controls and corrects.. - Practice in pairs (5 pairs) - Listen to the teacher - Do as teacher requested - Listen and write down. 2. Listen: * Pre-listening - Introduces some questions - Listen and ? What do you see in the map? answer ? How many roads/ streets / offices are there? - Introduces some new words - Listen and copy - Asks students to guess - Listen and matching. match * While-listening - Read the tape (twice) - Listen - Asks students to compare - Compare. their result with a partner - Asks some students to read - Read the their answers. answers aloud - Corrects - Listen and write down - Read the tape again to - Listen and correct: check up. * Post-listening - Asks students to play - Play as “Giving Directions” teacher requested. A: Excuse me. Can you help me? B: Yes. What can I do for you? A: Yes. Could you please give me some information, please? B: Yes, of course. What information do you want? A: I want to visit a museum. Would you suggest me one? B: I suggest you go to the History Museum. A: That sounds interesting. Do you mind telling me what time it opens? B: It opens from 8 am to 4 pm every day except Monday. A: Thank you very much. B: You're welcome. Have a nice day. ....... II. Listen. - highway: - tourist information center:. a) restaurant.

(177) - Controls and corrects. - Listen to the teacher. b) hotel c) bus station d) pagoda e) temple. 3. Consolidation. (3’) - T to retell the contents of the lesson. - Ss listen and remember. 4. Homework. (1') - Make conversation. - Read and prepare (Unit 11 - Read). **************************************************** Date of prepare: …………………………….. Class 8A.Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Class 8B.Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Period 69 Unit11. TRAVELING AROUND VIET NAM Read I. AIMS. 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson, students can read the passage for genaral information, check the topics and answer the questions. - Vocabulary: Offshore, water fall, resort, accommodation, tribal village... - Grammar: Should 2. Skills: - Practice reading the passage, checking the topics and answering the questions. 3. Attitude: - Know more about people, culture, countries in many countries which speak English. Then have good attitude about their country. II.TEACHING AIDS. 1. Teacher: Text book, plan, picture. 2. Students: Text books, notebooks, pens. III. PROCEDUCES. 1. Check the old lesson: - No check 2. New lesson: - Introduce the new lesson. (1’) Teacher’ activities I. Warm up (5’) “Guessing game”. Ss’ activities. Contents.

(178) - Give some information - Listen and about famous places in VN guess and ask students guess where it is Ex: 1. What do I talk about? - It has a lot of caves. - It consist of many islands - It is in Quang Ninh province. (Ha Long Bay) 2. Which city is it? - It is a famous tourist attraction. - Many flowers are grown there. - It is in Lam Dong province ( Da Lat) - Controls and corrects - Listen to the teacher II. Presentation (35’) * Pre-reading - Guide: In the reading today, we will know more about 4 places: Nha Trang, Da Lat, Sa Pa and Ha Long Bay. - Read the passages and introduce new words.. - Read and have students listen and repeat after the teacher. - Asks students to practice new words * While-reading - Read the tape (twice) - Asks students to read the text - Controls and corrects. - Listen to the teacher.. I. Read. - Listen and write down.. 1. New words. - Seaside resort (n): - Oceanic Institute (n): - Giant Buddha (n): - Offshore island (n): - external Spring (n): - Waterfall (n): - Mountainous resort (n): - Tribal village (n): - Mountain slopes (n): - World Heritage (n): - Magnificent (adj): - Limestone island (n):. - Listen and repeat. - Do as teacher requested. - Listen and read silently. - Read the text - Listen to the. 2. Check (v) the topics mentioned in the brochures about the resorts..

(179) - Asks students to read the text again and practice doing exercise 1 - Asks some students to read their answers - Corrects. teacher. - Practice - Read aloud. - Listen and write down. -Asks students to read the text again and practice doing exercise 2. - Practice. - Asks some students to read their answers - Corrects. - Read aloud before class. - Listen and write down. * Post-reading "Giving advice" - Explains and asks students to practice - Controls and corrects. - Practice in groups - Listen to the teacher.. 3. Consolidation. (3’) - T to retell the contents of the lesson. - Ss listen and remember. 4. Homework. (1') - Read text again. 1. Caves: Ha Long Bay 2. Flights to HN: Nha Trang 3. Hotels:: Da Lat, Sa Pa, Ha Long Bay 4. Local transport: all 4 places 5. Mini hotels: Ha Long Bay 6. Mountain slopes: Sa Pa 7. Railway: Nha Trang 8. Restaurants: no places 9. Sand beaches: Ha long Bay 10: Tourist attractions: all 4 places 11: Type of food: no place 12: Villages: Sa Pa 13: Water fall: Da lat 14: World Heritage: Ha Long Bay 3. Answer. Where should these people go? a. Andrew should go to SaPa b. Mary should go to all five places c. John should go to Nha Rong Harbor d. Joanne should go to Ha Long Bay e. Donna should go to Da Lat.

(180) - Read and prepare (Unit 11 - Write). ********************************************* Date of prepare: ……………………… Class 8A.Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Class 8B.Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Period 70 Unit11. TRAVELING AROUND VIET NAM Writing I. AIMS. 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson, students can write a trip or a story, read a story. Put the sentences, events in the correct choronological. - Vocabulary: Advanture (n), paddle (v) (n), canoe (n), hire (v)... - Grammar: The past simple tense (Revision). 2. Skills: - Practice reading, writing the story. Put the sentences. 3. Attitude: - Know more about people, culture, countries in many countries which speak English. Then have good attitude about their country. II.TEACHING AIDS. 1. Teacher: Text book, plan. 2. Students: Text books, notebooks, pens. III. PROCEDUCES. 1. Check the old lesson: (5') - Call some students read the passages 2. New lesson: - Introduce the new lesson. (1’) Teacher’ activities Ss’ activities I. Warm up (4’) - Ask students some questions: Listen and Have you ever retell a story or answer the an envent? When did? questions. II. Presentation (32’) * Pre-writing - Asks students to read the first - Listen and passage and answer some answer the questions questions Where did the Browns go last week? What was the weather like?. Contents. I. Write..

(181) - Corrects - Introduce some new words. - Listen - Listen and write down. - Read new words the first time and have them listen and repeat. - Call some read aloud before the class and corrected their pronunciation if there is any mistake. * While-writing - Asks students to read the next part of the story and complete the story by rewriting the sentences in the correcct chronological order. - Corrects then asks students to complete the story by using the pictures and the words given - Asks some students to read their writing - Correct. - Listen and repeat - Read aloud. - Practice. * New words. - advanture (n): - paddle (v) (n): - canoe (n): - hire (v): - dark cloud (n): - resuce (v): - learn over (v):. 1. Now, put the sentences in the correct chronological order to complete the story.. - Do as teacher requested - Read aloud - Listen and write. * Post-writing - Asks students to write a story - Write a story they had taken part in. - Asks some students to read - Read their writing. - Corrects - Listen. 1 - c) 2 - a) 3 - g) 4 - d) 5 - f) 6 - b) 7 - e) 2. Write about a memorable day of Uyen. Uyen had a day to remember last week d) She had a math exam on Friday and she got up late. b) She realized her alarm clock did not go off. e) As she was leaving home it started to rain heavily h) Uyen tried to run as fast as she could. a) Suddenly she stumbled against a rock and fell onto the road. f) Her school bag went into a pool and everything got wet. c) Strangely, the rain stopped as she got to her classroom..

(182) g) Luckily, she had enough time to finish the exam.. 3. Consolidation. (2’) - T to retell the contents of the lesson. - Ss listen and remember. 4. Homework. (1') - Practice writing. - Read "Unit 11 - Language focus". ***************************************************** Date of prepare: ……………………… Class 8A.Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Class 8B.Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Period 71. Unit11. TRAVELING AROUND VIET NAM (Cont’) Language focus I. AIMS 1. Knowledge - By the end of the lesson, students’ll be able to review passive forrm, adjectives followed by an infinitive, a noun clause. - Vocabulary: Revision words about environment - Grammar: Passive voice. Adjectives follow by an infinitive or a noun clause. 2. Skills - Practice reading, writing and doing exercises. 3. Attitude - Have more consciousness in protecting environment. II.TEACHING AIDS 1. Teacher: Text book, plan. 2. Students: Text books, notebooks, pens. III. PROCEDURES 1. Check the old lesson - No check 2. New lesson - Introduce the new lesson. (1’) Teacher’s activities I. Warm up:(5') - Have them play game: Palnisium. Students’activites - Play game. Contents do - done meet - met. play - played cut - cut.

(183) - Explains how to do then ask ss to practice. - Controls and corrects. II. Revision:(11') - Asks ss to repeat the form and the use of the structures. III. Practice:(25') - Asks ss to do exercise 1: - Asks some ss to practice - Corrects. - Explains how to do exercise 2 - Asks students to do exercise 2 - Asks some pairs to practice - Controls and corrects. - Practice in groups. teach - taught ……. - Listen. - Repeat.. - Practice - Practice in groups - Listen and write down. - Listen.. I.Revision - Past participle : The bicycles are very good. They are made in China. - The bicycles made in China are very good. - Present participle: The boy is my brother. He is sitting in the room. - The boy sitting in the room is my brother. -Requests with: Would/ Do you mind if....? Would you mind +V-ing? II.Exercises Ex1: - The man walking up the stairs is Mr. Quang - The woman carrying a bag is Miss Lien - The by standing next to Miss Lien is Nam - The girl standing by the table is Lan. Ex2:. - Practice in pairs - Practice - Listen and write down. - Explains how to do exercise - Listen 3 - Asks students to do - Practice in pairs exercise 3. - The doll dressed in red is two dollars - The toy animals kept in a cardboard are 10 dollars. - The flowers wrapped in blue paper is one dollar. - The trunk made from recycled aluminum cans is two dollars. Ex3:.

(184) - Asks some students to practice. - Practice (4 pairs). - Controls and corrects. - Listen and write down. - Asks students to do exercise 4 - Asks some pairs to practice - Controls and corrects. - Do exercise - Practice - Listen and copy down. a) Would you mind moving your car? - No, of course not. b) Would you mind putting out your cigarettes? - No, of course not. c) Would you mind getting me some coffee? - I'm sorry, I'm too busy right now. d) Would you mind waiting a moment? - I'm sorry I can't. I'm already late for work. Ex4: c) Would you mind if I used your telephone? - Pleases do. d) Do you mind if I turn off the radio? - I'd rather you didn't. e) Would you mind if I turned on the air-conditioner? - Please do. f) Do you mind if I watch TV while eating lunch? - No, of course not. *Further practice - Would you mind if I closed the door. - Please do. ............. 3. Consolidation: (3') - Passive voice. - Adjectives follow by an infinitive or a noun clause. 4. Homework: (1') - Do the exercises again - Make sentences - Prepare for the next lesson: Revision *****************************************************.

(185) Date of prepare: ……………………… Class 8A.Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Class 8B.Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Period 72. REVISION I. AIMS 1.Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson, ss’ll be able to review main grammar from unit 9 to 11 - Vocabulary: Revision - Grammar: - In order to / So as to - Future simple - Modal will to make requests, offers & promises - Passive form - Adjectives + V-infi/ a noun clause - ed/ ing participles - Request with :Would you mind +V-ing/ if...? 2.Skills: - To practice doing exercise 3.Attitude: - Love subject and work hard, education enviroment II. TEACHING AIDS 1. Teacher:Teacher’s book, students’ book, plan. 2. Students: Text books, notebooks, pens, work books.... III. PROCEDURES 1. Check the old lesson - No check 2. New lesson : - Introduce the new leson (1’) Teacher’s activities I.Warm up (5’). Ss’activites. -Ask ss some questions -Listen and answer ?How are you today? ?Do you like learning English? ?Is your English good? ?What do you do to improve your English?. Contents.

(186) II.Revision (15’) -Help ss to revise grammar. -In order to / So as to. -Listen and revise -Copy down. -Future simple. -Retell and copy down. -Modal will to make requests, offers & promises. -Revise and write down. - Passive form. -Practice and copy down. -Adjectives + V-infi/ a noun clause. -Retell and copy down. -ed/ ing participles. -Retell and copy down. I.Revision 1.In order to/ so as to =>Perpose Eg:I went to Hanoi in order to meet my grandmother. She gets up early so as to go to school on time 2.Future simple -Using: to express an action will happen. Eg:He will be here on time. Will you go to with Lan this afternoon? 3.Modal will to make polite requests / offers / promises -Will you answer the telephone, please? ->Request -I’ll paint the door this afternoon. -->Offer -I promise. I’ll study harder. 4.Passive form: +Present of passive S+ am/is/are +PII Eg:E is spoken all over the world +Past of passive S + was/ were + PII Eg:Truyen Kieu was written by Nguyen Du +Modal of passive S + modal +be +PII Eg:The work will be finished tomorrow 5.Adj + to-infi/ a clause Eg:It’s difficult to get job . Mai was happy that she got good mark 6.Past participle : The bicycles are very good. They are made in China..

(187) -Request with :Would you mind +V-ing/ if... III.Exercises (20’) -Give exercises on second board Ex1:Combine these sentences using in order to/ so as to. 1. Minh does morning exercises regulary. He wants to be healthy 2. You have to wear warm clothes. You won’t catch a cold. 3. I’m learning e.I want to read books in English Ex2:Rewrite sentences. 1.Peole cut the bottles into small pieces 2.People will break the glass bottles into small pieces 3. We are going to clean the enviroment. We are ready -Ask ss to do exercises -Call on ss answer -Correct and give correct answer. 2.Consolidation (3’) - Review grammar points 3.Homework (1’). -Revise and copy down. +The bicycles made in China are very good. 7. Requests with: Would/ Do you mind if....? Would you mind +V-ing?. -Practice. II.Exercise. -Do exercise -Answer -Correct and copy down. Ex1. 1.Minh does morning exercises regulary in order to be healthy 2.You have to wear warm clothes so as to not catch a cold. 3.I’m learning E in order to read books in English Ex2: 1.The bottles are cut into... 2.The glass bottles will be broken.... 3.We are ready to clean the...

(188) - Learn grammar and do ex - Prepare for test 45’ ************************************************ Date of prepare: ……………………… Class 8A.Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Class 8B.Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Period 73. WRITTEN TEST (No 3) Time: 45’ I. AIMS 1. Knowledge - By the end of the lesson, students’ll be able to know more about grammar structures, vocabulary they have learned from unit 9 to unit 11. 2. Skills - Practice listening, reading, writing and doing exercises. 3. Attitude - Have more consciousness in learning English and like subject. II. TEACHING AIDS 1. Teacher: Plan, chalk 2. Students: Papers, pens. III. PROCEDURES.

(189) 1. Matrix: Cấp độ Tªn Chủ đề (néi dung, ch¬ng…). NhËn biÕt. TN. TL. TN. TL. TL. Cấp độ cao TN TL. 5 c©u 0,5 ®iÓm. 5 c©u 2,5 ®iÓm =25 %. The environ ment. II. Reading. Sè c©u Sè ®iÓm TØ lÖ %. 5 c©u 0,5 ®iÓm. 5 c©u 2,5 ®iÓm =25%. Circle the best option 4c©u 0,5 ®iÓm. 4 c©u 2,0 ®iÓm =20%. IV. Writing. Using reported speech. Sè c©u Sè ®iÓm TØ lÖ % Tæng sè c©u T«ng sè ®iÓm TØ lÖ %. TN. Céng. Fill the blanks. Sè c©u Sè ®iÓm TØ lÖ %. Sè c©u Sè ®iÓm TØ lÖ%..... VËn dông Cấp độ thấp. I. Listening. III. Language focus. Th«ng hiÓu. 5 c©u 0,5 ®iÓm 4 c©u 2,0 ®iÓm 20 %. 10 c©u 5,0 ®iÓm 50 %. 3 c©u 3,0 ®iÓm 30 %. 5 c©u 2,5 ®iÓm =25% 17 c©u 10 ®iÓm 100 %.

(190) 2. Questions I. Listening: Listen to the passage and fill in the blanks (2,5 points). The best way to protect our (1)................. is to reduce the amount (2)..........garbage. We can recycle some materials instead of putting them into the garbage. As you know, this meam that we need to use the old materials in the garbage to make (3)......Already in many (4).........................people can recycle their newspapers, bottles and (5).................... II. Reading: Read the letter and answer the questions follow (2, 5 points). Dear Lan, I arrived in Australia a week ago and i think that my English is improving. I am living in a small flat near the centre of Sydney. It is cheap and quite comfortable. In your letter you ask what I am going to do improve English. Well, tomorrow I am going to visit the language centre to see what English classes they offer there in the evenings. Of course, I am going to read a newspaper every day. There are some good bookshops here, so I am also going to look for some other books to read before bed time. Are you going to write to me soon? Hope to hear from you all soon Nam,  Questions 1. When did Nam arrive to Australia? 2. Where does he live? 3. Is it cheap and comfortable? 4. What is he going to do improve English? 5. What is he going to do before bedtime? III. Language focus: Circle the best answer (A, B, C or D to complete the following sentences (2,0 points) 1. This house ………….. last year. A. built B. is built C. was built D. building 2. People should ………… plastic bag rather than throw them away. A. reuse B. reused C. reusing D. to reuse 3. My mother asked me ……….. to bed early. A. go B. went C. to go D. going 4. English ………….. all over the world. A. speak B. is speaking C. to speak D. is spoken IV. Writing: Rewrite the following sentences, Using reported speech: (3,0 points) 1. “Can I use your bike?” - Would you mind if………………………………………………………….

(191) 2. My class won the first prize in collecting cans. My teacher feels please. - My teacher feels pleased ……………………………………………………… 3. We will grow a lot of trees in the parks. - A lot of trees............................................................................................... 3. Answers and marks Câu I. Listening : Listen to the passage and fill in the blanks. Đáp án. III. Language focus: Circle the best answer (A, B, C or D to complete the following sentences. 1. environment 2. of 3. new things 4. countries 5. cans Tapescrip: The best way to protect our environment is to reduce the amount of garbage. We can recycle some materials instead of putting them into the garbage. As you know, this meam that we need to use the old materials in the garbage to make new things. Already in many countries people can recycle their newspapers, bottles and cans. 1. He arrived Australia a week ago. 2. He lives in a small flat. 3. Yes, it is. 4. He is going to visit the language center to see what English classes they offer. 5. He is going to look for some other books to read before bedtime. 1. C 2. A 3. C 4. D. IV. Writing: Rewrite the following sentences, Using reported speech. 1. Would you mind if I used your bike? 2. My teacher feels pleased that my class won the first prize in collecting cans. 3. A lot of trees will be grown in the park.. II. Reading: Read the passage and answer the questions follow. Điểm 0,5 0,5 0,5 0,5 0,5. 0,5 0,5 0,5 0,5 0,5. 0,5 0,5 0,5 0,5 1,0 1,0 1,0. Date of prepare: ……………………… Class 8A.Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Class 8B.Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: ……...

(192) Period 74. Unit 12: A VACATION ABROAD Getting started - Listen and read I. AIMS 1. Knowledge - By the end of the lesson, students can know about some interesting places in Canada, The United States and England. Read and listen a dialogue. - Vocabulary: Include, unfortunately, accommodations, business meeting... - Grammar: Would you like to + v-ing..?... 2. Skills - Practice listening, reading the dialogue, asking and answering the questions. 3. Attitude - Love their country and other countries in the world. II.TEACHING AIDS 1. Teacher: Text book, plan, casstte, tape and picture. 2. Students: Text books, notebooks, pens. III. PROCEDURES 1. Check the old lesson: - No check 2. New lesson: - Introduce the new leson (1’) Teacher’s activities Students’ activites Contents I. Warm up:(5') + Networks Countries in the world - Have students play game. - Practice in groups Canada - Controls and corrects - Listen to the China teacher. Russia Cuba Australia England II. Presentation:(36') + “Getting started” - Explains, introduces the pictures and situation. - Ask students to work in pairs match the names of the coutries in the box with oppropriate pictures. - Controls and corrects - Have student practie in. - Look at the pictures and listen. - Look at the pictures and practice. I. Getting started 1. Match the names of the countries.... a) The USA b) Australia c) Thailand d) Britain e) Canada f) Japan 2. Tell your partner which - Listen and answer country you would like to visit - Listen and write down..

(193) pairs, ask and answer the questions as examples on page 111.. - Call some practice before the class and correct. - Ask students to look at part 2 and listen to the teacher. - Have them practice in pairs ask and answer. - Who are they in the picture? - What are they doing? - Where are they? - Can you guess what are they talking about? ...... - Introduces some new words. and write. S1: Which country do you want to visit? S2: I'd like to visit Britain. S1: Why? S2: Because I want to practice speaking my English with English people. - Listen and copy down - Look at the book, listen. - Listen and practice in pairs. - Listen and copy.. - Read the fisrt time and - Listen and repeat have them repeat after that. - Introduces some new - Listen and write. structures. - Read the tape. - Asks some pairs to practice reading.. II. Listen and read. - Read - Practice reading. a. New words - include: - unfortunately: - accommodations: - business meeting: - surprise: b. Grammar + Making an invitation: đưa ra lời mời Would you like....? Ex: Would you like to come and stay with us? + Declining an invitation: Từ chối lời mời That's very kind of you but we are coming on... + Accepting an invitation: Nhận lờ mời I'd love to/ That's great + Making a complaint: Phàn nàn “Oh dear, He is always working”..

(194) - Correct then asks students - Read again and do to read the dialogue again and do exercise 1 - Asks some students to - Read aloud write their answers. - Corrects if there is any - Write mistake. - Ask students to read the conversation again and answer the questions. - Asks some pairs to practice - Controls and corrects. - Read the conversation again and answer the questions. - Practice - Listen and write down. 1. Complete Mrs. Quyen's schedule.. Mon 25: Coming to San fancico Tue 26: Going out Wed 27: Having dinner with the Smith Thu 28: Leaving San Fancisco 2. Answer the following questions.. a) No, they don't. Because they are coming on a tour, and their accommodations is included on the ticket price. So they will stay at the hotel. b) No, he won't. Because he will have a business meeting in the evening. c) Her friend, Mrs. Smith, will pick her up at the hotel.. [ 3. Consolidation: (2') - Repeat the names of some coutries and the structure. - Listen and remember 4. Homework: (1') - Do exercises 1, 2, 3 on pages 70, 71 in workbook. - Prepre "Unit 11 Speak ". ***************************************************** Date of prepare: ……………………… Class 8A.Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Class 8B.Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Period 75.

(195) Unit 12: A VACATION ABROAD Speak I.AIMS 1.Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson, students’ ll be able to practice speaking to make a plan about the tour. - Vocabulary about the make plan - Structures :making plan 2.Skills: - To develop speaking and listening skill. 3.Attitude: - Work hard and like subject II.TEACHING AIDS 1. Teacher: Teacher’s book, students’ book, plan, pictures 2. Student: Student book, note book.... III.PROCEDURES 1. Check the pre- lesson. (5’) - Call 2 Ss go to the board and practice the dialogue and answer the questions 2. New lesson : - Introduce the new leson (1’) Teacher’s activities I.Warm up (4’) “Jumbled words” -Explains and asks Ss to practice 1. ewn oyrk 2. awstignonh 3. sol nagesel 4. oachcig 5. ... -Controls and corrects II.Presentation (32’) 1.Pre-speaking -Introduces some new words -Controls. 2.While-speaking -Asks Ss to read the example in the book. and the iltirary. Ss' activites. Contents. - Practice. 1. New York 2. Washington 3. Los Angeles 4. Chicago 5. _ _ _ _ _ _ _. -Practice. Speakl *New words. - rate per night -single / double -facility -business center *Practice A: Where shall we stay? B: We'll stay at Atlantic Hotel. The price there is reasonable. - Read in pairs..

(196) - Explains and asks Ss to - Read in pairs. practice in pairs the complete the literary. - Asks some pairs to practice - Practice in pairs (6 pairs) -Controls and corrects. 3. Post-speaking -Asks Ss to practice in pairs to make conversation -Controls and corrects.. - Practice.. and it also has swimming pool. A: What time shall we leave Los Angeles? B: The flight will depart at 14.00 on Monday and we'll arrive in Boston at 18.00. As scheduled, we'll leave Boston on Thursday. A: What are we going to do there? B: We'll visit Boston University, art galleries and eat seafood. *Further practice A: Where shall we stay? B: We'll stay at Lo Giang Hotel. The price there is reasonable and it is near Lo river. A: What time shall we leave Na Hang? B: The bus will leave at 6.00 on Monday and we'll arrive in Tuyen Quang at 9.00. As scheduled, we'll leave Tuyen Quang on Thursday. A: What are we going to do there? B: We'll go shopping.. 3. Consolidation (2’) - Making a plan about -Weather. 4. Homework (1’) - Do exercises in work book. - Prepre "Unit 12 Listen ***************************************************** Date of prepare: ……………………… Class 8A.Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Class 8B.Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Period 76.

(197) Unit 12: A VACATION ABROAD Listen I.AIMS 1.Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson, students’ ll be able to practice speaking to make a plan about the tour. +To practice listening comprehension: completing a weather forecast table. - Vocabulary about weather - Structures :making plan 2.Skills: - To develop speaking and listening skill. 3.Attitude: - Work hard and like subject II.TEACHING AIDS 1. Teacher: Teacher’s book, students’ book, plan, pictures, sub-board 2. Student:Student book, note book.... III.PROCEDURES 1. Check the pre- lesson. (5’) -2 Ss go to the board and practice the dialogue and answer the questions 2. New lesson : - Introduce the new leson (1’) Teacher’sactivities I.Warm up (4’) - Ask ss some questions: +, What’s the weather like today? +, How do you feel today? .................................... - Corrects I.Presentation (32’) 1.Pre-listening -Asks some questions: - What's the weather like today? - What weather do you like? - .... -Introduces some new words -Asks Ss to guess matching. -Corrects and introduces the table. Ss'activites. Contents. - Answer the questions.. - Listen and answer. I.Listen.. - Listen and read. *New words -sunny # rainy -windy -snowy -Minus degree -Zero degree. - Practice.

(198) 2. While-listening: -Read the tape ( twice) -Asks Ss to compare their result with a partner -Asks some Ss to read their answer. -Corrects and give the key the turns on the tape again.. 3.Post-listening - Introduce a table and asks Ss to practice - Controls and corrects. - Listen and match - Practice. -degree centigrade -Temperature -low # High *Listen. City. weather. - Read. Sydne y. drywindy. - Listen and check. Tokyo. drywindy Londo humidn cold Banko warmk dry Newyo windyrk coludy Paris cool-dry. Temperature Low High 20 26 15. 22. -3. 7. 24. 32. 8. 15. 10. 16. - Practice in groups. 3. Consolidation (2’) - Repeat the main contents - Listen and remember 4. Homework (1’) - Do exercises in work book. - Prepre "Unit 12 Read" ***************************************************** Date of prepare: ……………………… Class 8A.Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Class 8B.Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Period 77. Unit 12: A VACATION ABROAD.

(199) Read I. AIMS 1. Knowledge - By the end of the lesson, students will be able to read these postcards, ask and answer the questions. - Vocabulary: Lava (n), pour out (v), valley (n)... - Grammar: Past simple tense with “when” and “while”. 2. Skills - Practice read these postcards, asking and answering the questions. 3. Attitude - Love their country and other countries in the world. II.TEACHING AIDS 1. Teacher: Text book, plan. 2. Students: Text books, notebooks, pens. III. PROCEDURES 1. Check the old lesson: (5') - A student to do exercise 4 in workbook. 2. New lesson: - Introduce the new leson (1’) Teacher’s activities I. Warm up:(4') - Ask students How are you to day? Can you tell me some famous places in the world? ……………………… II. Presentation (32’) * Pre-reading - Ask students these questions: Do you remember Mrs. Quyen? What plan did she have? - Introduce: As we know, Mrs. Quyen and her husband went on holiday to USA. They visited lots of famous places of interest. You look at the pictures and guess which. Students' activites - Listen and answer. - Listen to the teacher and answer.. - Listen and guess.. Contents.

(200) places she visited. - Introduces some new words. - Listen to the teacher and write. - Read and have students listen and repeat.. - Listen and repeat. - Asks students to practice and asks some guiding questions - How many post cards did Mrs. Quyen send? - What did she do in New York? - Explain the structures.. - Listen and practice. * While-reading - Read the tape (twice). - Listen and answer. - Asks some students to read the text - Controls and corrects. Then asks Ss to read the text again and practice doing exercise 1 - Asks some students to read their answers. 1. New words - Lava (n): - pour out (v): - Valley (n): - carve in to (v): - Fisherman's Wharf: - Statue of Liberty: - The Empire State Building: - volcano (n):. - Listen and write. - Listen and read silently. - Read the text. - Practice. 2. Grammar + Past simple tense with ‘when and while’ Ex: The lava was pouring out when we flew overhead - While i was sitting my Dad... => S + was/ were +V-ing when/ while + S + Vpast: Hành động đang xảy ra hành động khác xen vµo. 3. Write what did Mrs. Quyen did and saw in each of places.. Place What she did and saw a) Hawaii Went swimming, visited Kilauea Volcano b) New York Went shopping, bought lots of souvenirs c) Chicago Saw lake Michigan d) Mount Rushmore Saw the heads of four American.

(201) - Read - Asks students to read the text again and practice doing exercise 2 - Asks some students to read their answers. - Take note.. * Post-reading - Practice - Ask ss to do True or false 1. The Mount Rusmore - Read has the picture of three american president's head. 2. The Emprise state Building is in Newyork. 3. Kilawvea Volcano is in Chicago 4. The Fisherman's Wharf, the Napa Velley winegrowing erea are in the Hawaian Island of Ohio - Correct - Listen and write. presidents e) San Francisco Visited Fisherman's Wharf, the Napa Valley, the wine growing area and the Alcatraz prison 4. Answer the following questions. a) She took a small plane to Kilauea Volcano/ She went there by plane b) She saw the famous prison on the island of Altraz in the middle of San Francisco Bay. c) It is a mount where the heads of four American presidents are carved into the rock. d) The other name of Chicago is "The windy City" e) She went shopping.. 1-F ; 2-T ; 3-F; 4-F. 3. Consolidation: (2') - Past present progressive tense. 4. Homework: (1') - Read the text and learn words. - Make sentences with 'when/ while, - Prepare "Unit 11: Write” *********************************************************** Date of prepare: ……………………… Class 8A.Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Class 8B.Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: ……...

(202) Period 78. Unit 12: A VACATION ABROAD Write I. AIMS 1. Knowledge - By the end of the lesson, students will be able to writing a post card - Vocabulary: (Revision) - Grammar: Writing a post card Progressive tense with 'always, 2. Skills - Practice writing a post card. 3. Attitude - Love their country and other countries in the world. II.TEACHING AIDS 1. Teacher: Text book, plan. 2. Students: Text books, notebooks, pens. III. PROCEDURES 1. Check the old lesson - No check 2. New lesson - Introduce the new leson (1’) Teacher’s activities I. Warm up:(5') ? What did you often do when you go to a picnic? Let's write a list of things you did. - Call on ss read aloud. - Correct. Students' activites. Contents. - Listen and answer - Read aloud - Listen to the teacher.. II. Presentation (36’) * Pre-writing - Ask students some - Answer questions. ? Do you always send postcards to your friends or relaties when you are on holiday? ? What do you write on your postcard?. + Sightseeing + Taking photo + Eating special foods + Buying and sending postcard. 1. Complete the postcard Mrs. Quyen sent from the USA..

(203) - Asks students to read the - Read and find out post card and find out new words - Ask students to complete - Complte the postcard - Corrects and introduces the - Copy down 1) in 2) people situation 3) weather 4) visited 5) her 6) nice 7) bought 8) for 9) heaviness 10) soon - Ask students to read aloud - Read aloud completed postcard. - Controls - Give some information to - Listen and copy * Form of a post card. write a postcard (Place, down + Place: Name of place you visit weather, what you see and + People: Friendly,... buy…) + Weather: Warm, cold.. + Who you meet: Friend.. * While-writing + What you buy:... - Asks students to practice - Practice 2.Write a postcard to a friend writing. - Asks some students to read - Read the writing their writing - Corrects - Listen to the teacher and write.. * Post-writing - Asks students to correct their partner's writing - Corrects. - Correct their partner's writing - Listen. Dear My, I am having a good time in Cat Ba Island. The people here are very friendly and helpful. The weather has been sunny and windy. In Cat Ba town, I visited my aunt and her children. I spent the whole morning playing with the kids. I bought a lot of souvenirs. Shopping here is wonderful. There are lots to buy. See you soon Your friend ........ * Note: - Progressive tense with 'always, to express a complaining. Ex: Thanh is always complaining about the heaviness of my suitcase..

(204) 3. Consolidation: (2') - Past present progressive tense with always. - How to write a postcard 4. Homework: (1') - Write a similar postcard to your friends - Prepre "Unit 11: Language focus". ***************************************************** Date of prepare: ……………………… Class 8A.Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Class 8B.Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Period 79. Unit 12: A VACATION ABROAD Language focus I. AIMS 1. Knowledge - By the end of the lesson, students will be able to review and practice the past progressive and other tenses - Vocabulary: - Grammar: Past progressive / Past progressive tense with “when” and “while”. Progressive tense with always 2. Skills - To practice doing exercises. 3. Attitude - Like subject and more hardworking. II.TEACHING AIDS 1. Teacher: Text book, plan. 2. Students: Text books, notebooks, pens. III. PROCEDURES 1. Check the old lesson - No check 2. New lesson - Introduce the new leson (1’) Teacher’sactivities I. Warm up:(5') - Ask students to change these verbs into progressive tense (add- ing) - Controls and corrects.. Students' activites - Change the verbs - Listen to the. Contents do - doing play - playing meet - meeting buy- buying teach - teaching …….

(205) teacher II. Revision:(7') - Asks students to repeat the - Say aloud form and the use of the structures + Past progressive tense + Past progressive tense with ' when and while, + Progressives tense with always III. Practice:(30') - Asks students to do exercise 1: - Asks some students to practice - Corrects. - Explains how to do exercise 2 - Asks students to do exercise 2 - Asks some pairs to practice - Controls and corrects. - Explains how to do ex 3 - Asks students to do exercise 3. - Listen and answer - Practice in pairs - Listen and write down. - Listen to the teacher - Practice - Do as requested - Take note.. - Listen - Do exercise. I. Revision 1. Past progressive + She was watching TV at this time yesterday + He was reading a book while his mother was cooking meal + When I came, he was playing chess. 2. Progressive tense with always: + They are always coming late II. Practice 1. Ex1-p119 b) Hoa was having dinner at 8 .00 last night c) Bao was doing his homework at 8.00 last night d) Nga was writing a letter at 8.00 last night e) Na was walking with her dog f) Lan was talking to.... 2. Ex2-p119. b - F : While Hoa was eating, the phone rang c - E: When Nam won the race, the crowd was cheering d - B: Mrs. Thoa was cooking when Tuan arrived home e - D: When Lan arrived at school, the school drum was sounding. f - A: It was raining when the plain got to Ha Noi. 3. Ex3-p120.

(206) - Asks some students to practice - Controls and corrects. - Practice - Write down. a. Bao is always forgetting his homework b. Mrs. Nga is always losing her umbrella. c. Mr. and Mrs. Thanh are always missing the bus d. Nam is always watching TV. e. Na is always talking on the phone. f. Liem is always going out.. 3. Consolidation: (2') + Past progressive tense. + Past progressive tense with ‘when and while’ + Progressives tense with always. 4. Homework: (1') - Prepare unit 13: Getting started - Listen and read. ***************************************************** Date of prepare: ……………………… Class 8A.Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Class 8B.Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Period 80. CORRECT THE TEST (No 3) I. AIMS 1. Knowledge - By the end of the lesson, Ss will be to correct the mistakes in their tests. - Vocabulary: - Grammar: 2. Skills - Practice doing exercises 3. Attitude - Like subject and more consciousness in learning English. II.TEACHING AIDS 1. Teacher: Text book, plan. 2. Students: Text books, notebooks, pens. III. PROCEDURES 1. Check the old lesson - No check 2. New lesson.

(207) - Introduce the new leson (1’) Teacher’s activities Students’ activities I.Warm up:(5') - Ask ss some questions. - Answer the ? How are you today? questions ? Are you worried about your test? ? Is good or bad? II. Presentation:(37') - Remark the written test + Total: + Good: + Fair: + Poor: - Pay & correct the test. I. Listening - Read the listening again to students check the answers - Give correct answers and marks II. Reading - Ask students to read the text and answer again. - Correct mistakes. III. Language focus. - Explain each sentence and say reason choosing. - Give correct answers. - Listen to the teacher. - Look at the test & correct mistakes. - Listen and check the answer - Write. Contents. 1. Remark the test + Total: + Good: + Fair: + Poor: 2. Correct the test.. I. Listening: Listen to the passage and fill in the blanks. 1. environment 2. of 3. new things 4. countries 5. cans. - Read again and II. Reading: Read the answer passage and answer the - Correct questions follow 1. He arrived Australia a week ago. 2. He lives in a small flat. 3. Yes, it is. 4. 4. He is going to visit the language center to see what English classes they offer. 5. 5. He is going to look for some other books to read before bedtime. - Listen and correct III. Language focus: Circle - Write the best answer (A, B, C or D to complete the following sentences 1. C 2. A.

(208) IV. Writing - Guide students to write sentences. - Give correct answers. - Rewrite - Listen.. 3. C 4. D IV. Writing: Rewrite the following sentences, Using reported speech: 1. Would you mind if I used your bike? 2. My teacher feels pleased that my class won the first prize in collecting cans. 3. A lot of trees will be grown in the park.. 3. Remember: (2') - Retell the contents of the lesson 4. Home work: (1') - Prepare: Unit 12 (Getting started - Listen and read). ************************************************* Date of prepare: ……………………… Class 8A.Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Class 8B.Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Period 81. Unit 13: FESTIVALS Getting started - Listen and read. I. AIMS 1. Knowledge - By the end of the lesson, students will be able to talk about traditional festivals. - Vocabulary: Rub (v), husk, judge (n), council (n)... - Grammar: Compound words 2. Skills - Listen and read a dialogue for general information. Checking the boxes 3. Attitude - Know more about culture, people, country. Then love their country. II.TEACHING AIDS 1. Teacher: Text book, plan, pictures, cassette and tape. 2. Students: Text books, notebooks, pens. III. PROCEDURES 1. Check the old lesson - No check.

(209) 2. New lesson: - Introduce the new leson (1’) Teacher’s activities I. Warm up:(10') + ‘Getting started” - Explains, introduces the picture and situation. - Ask sstudents to practice in pairs: Imagine that we have 5 friends coming to Viet Nam from diffirent countries. Each person has a hobby. You work in groups and answer the question: Where should they go on their visits to Viet Nam. - Call some pairs read the answers and corrects. II.Presentation:(31') - Asks students to look at the picture and answer some questions. - Who is this? - What is she doing? - Hang the picture on the board and introduce the festivals in Viet Nam. - Play the tape and have them listen. - Introduces some new words. Students’ activites. Contents. - Look at the picture. - Listen and practice in pairs.. 1. Getting started.. - Read aloud and write down. 1. Tom should go to beautiful beaches such as Do Son, Nha Trang.... 2. David should go to acient city of Hue or Hoi An 3. Huckleberry should go to Sa Pa 4. Oliver should go to Bat trang pottery village 5. Robinson should go to HCM city or HN capital.. - Look at the picture and answer. 2. Listen and read. - Look at the picture and listen to the teacher. - Listen to the tape. - Listen and copy down. a. New words - Rice- cooking festival (n): - Water-fetching contest (n): - fire- making: - river bank (n): - starting position (n): - upset (v):.

(210) - Read and have students repeat after that. - Call some read aloud. - Listen and repeat.. - Introduces the structures. - Listen and write down. - Play the tape again. - Listen. - Asks some pairs to practice reading.. - Practice reading. - Correct then asks students to read the dialogue again and do exercise 1. - Call some read the answers and correct if there is any mistake.. - Practice. - Read aloud. - Read aloud. Listen and write down. - yell (v): - rub (v): - husk(n): - judge (n): - council (n): b. Grammar: Passive form - The fire is made in the traditional way + Compound words: - A story telling competition - A coffee growing regon => a/ an + N + V-ing + N c. Practice the dialogue with a partner. d. True or false? a) False. only one team member takes part in the water - fetching contests b) False. One person has to collect one bottle c) True d) False. Pieces of bamboo are used to make fire e) False. In the final contest, the judges taste the rice f) True. 3. Consolidation: (3') - Have them give some festivals in Viet Nam. - Passive voice - Compound words 4. Homework: (1') - Read the dialogue and learn new words & stuctures - Do exercises 1, 2, 3 on pages 75, 76 in workbook. - Prepre “Unit 13: Speak – Listen” **************************************************** Date of prepare: ……………………… Class 8A.Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Class 8B.Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Period 82. Unit 13: FESTIVALS (Cont’) Speak - Listen.

(211) I. AIMS 1. Knowledge - By the end of the lesson, students will be able to practice speaking and listening about festivals in Viet Nam. Ask and anwer about prepare for a festival. - Vocabulary: Pomegranate (n), sweetie, tailor (n)... - Grammar: Want sth/ to do smth 2. Skills - Practice speaking and listening about festivals in Viet Nam. Filling in the gaps 3. Attitude - Know more about culture, people, country. Then love their country. II.TEACHING AIDS 1. Teacher: Text book, plan, cassette and tape. 2. Students: Text books, notebooks, pens. III. PROCEDURES 1. Check the old lesson: (5') - Call some students reread the dialogue. 2. New lesson - Introduce the new leson (1’). Teacher’s activities I. Warm up:(4') - Ask students to tell festivals in Viet Nam they’ve known - Controls and corrects 1. village fastivals 2. school festivals 3. flower festivals. Students’ activites. Contents. - Practice. II. Presentation (21') 1. Speak * Pre-speaking - What do you do before - Listen and answer Tet? - What is the most important to prepare for Tet? - Have students to read the - Read and find out sentences in the box and new words introduces some new words. I. Speak.

(212) - Write on the board and ask students to practice. - Copy and practice. - Asks students to read the example in the book. - Ask students to arrange the sentences in order to make a complete dialogue. - Call on some pairs practice - Correct and give answers. - Read in pairs. - Explain structures : Want smth/ to do smth - Ask students to give examples * While-speaking - Asks students to make their own dialogue. Talk about preparations for another festival - Ask sudents to choose one of the festival they like most then give cue words Ex: Decorate/clean/ paint (house, school/ classroom...) + Buy cake/candy/ drinks... + Cook meal/ make cakes.. + Get new dress.. + Write / send letters of invitation - Call on some pairs practice - Correct and give answers. - Listen. - Practice - Work in pairs - Copy down. - pomegranate (n): quả lựu - sweetie: con yêu - tailor (n): thợ may Ex1: Put the sentences in the correct order A-F-C-H-D-J-B-GE -I. - Make example. - Practice. Ex2: Make similar dialogues. - Work in pairs. - Practice - Correct. A: You see all the students in our school are actively to prepare for our school festival. What have you had in mind for this important event? B: Sure. It’s very importance because it’s the 40th founding anniversary of our school. What should we do? B: I think we should decorate our classroom first A: That’s right. We’ll clean the windows, doors, cover the teacher’s table with a towel B: Good idea. We should put.

(213) * Post-speaking - Call some pairs reread the dialogue before the class. 2. Listening:(10') * Pre-listening - What kind of food do we prepare for Tet? - What kind of flowers do we need to buy? - Introduces some new words. - Read and have them repeat - Ask students to practice ? Can you guess what the Robison do and buy for Tet? * While-listening - Introduce the listening and play the tape twice and asks students to fill in the gaps - Asks some students to read - Ask students to read again to check the answers - Controls and corrects. flowers on the teacher’'table ...... B: Ok. I’ll tell them in today’s meeting. Bye A: Bye. - Read aloud.. - Listen and answer. II. Listen. - Copy down. - peach blossom (n): hoa đào - marigold (n): hoa cúc vạn thọ - dried watermelon seeds (n): hạt dưa - apricot blossom (n): hoa mai. - Listen and repeat - Guess. Ex1: Listen to the conversation and fill in the gaps. - Listen and prepare - Answer - Listen & check - Copy. - Asks students to practice in - Practice pairs to write a list of things you do before Tet - Controls and corrects. - Correct. a) Mr. Robinson/ flower market b) traditional c) dried watermelon seeds d) make Ex 2: Complete the note Things to do + Mr. Robinson Go to the flower market to buy peach blossoms and a bunch of marigold + Liz Go to the market to buy some can dies and a packet of.

(214) * Post-listening - Ask students some questions. ? What do you always do before tet? ? Do you buy as the Robinson? ? Do you prepare new clothes before Tet?. - Answer Prepare for Tet Food: Chung cake, candy, dried watermelon seeds, jam,.….. Fruits: bananas, grapefruits,.……. Flowers: peach blossoms, apricot blossoms, marigold violet,.…….. dried watermelon seeds + Mrs. Robinson Go to Mrs. Hoa to learn how to make spring rolls.. 3. Consolidation: (2') - Repeat the main content of the lesson - Prepare for Tet 4. Homework: (1') - Write the things you prepare for Tet - Do exercise 8 on page 82 in workbook - Prepare “Unit 13: Read” ************************************************** Date of prepare: ……………………… Class 8A.Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Class 8B.Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Period 83. Unit 13: FESTIVALS (Cont’) Read. I. AIMS 1. Knowledge - By the end of the lesson, students will be able to know about a famous festival in many countries: Christmas. - Vocabulary: Santa Clause, Patron Saint, design, church, professor... - Grammar: Reported speech, the passive form 2. Skills - Practice reading the passage, completing the table and asking and answering the questions. 3. Attitude - Know more about culture, people, country. Then love their country..

(215) II.TEACHING AIDS 1. Teacher: Text book, plan. 2. Students: Text books, notebooks, pens. III. PROCEDURES 1. Check the old lesson: (5') - Call some students say what they prepare for Tet. 2. New lesson - Introduce the new leson (1’). Teacher’s activities I. Warm up:(4') - Play game “Guessing game” +This is the biggest festival in Westen countries. + People often decorate a tree and exchange best wishes by giving cards to each other + It is on December 25th - Controls and corrects. Students’ activites - Listen and guess. - Listen to the teacher. II. Presentation (32’) * Pre-reading - Ask students to look at the - Look at and picture and answer answer ? Do you celebrate Christmas? ? Whay do you often do at Christmas? ? What do you know about Christmas? - Introduces some new words - Listen and copy down. - Ask students to listen and practice - Call some students read aloud - Controls and corrects - Repeat the structures. Contents. - Listen and read silently - Read aloud - Listen - Listen and copy. 1. New words. - Christmas tree (n): - Christmas card (n): - Christmas Carols (n): - Santa Claus (n): - Patron saint (n): - church (n): - jolly (adj): - professor (n): - spread through: 2.Grammar.

(216) * While-reading - Read 4 passages - Asks some students to read the text - Controls and corrects the asks students to read the text again and practice doing exercise 1 - Asks some students to read their answers - Check up and give the answers. - Read the text - Do as teacher requested - Practice. - Read - Copy down. - Asks students to read the text - Practice again and practice doing exercise 2 - Asks some students to read - Read their answer - Corrects - Copy down. * Post-reading - Asks students to translate into Vietnamese. (+) Passive form: Christmas songs were performed for people in twon (+) Reportspeech They said the song were unsuitable 3. Complete the table. - Translate. + Christmas specials The Christmas tree The Christmas Card Christmas Carols Santa Claus + Places of origin Riga England No information TheUSA + Date Early 1500s Mid-19th century 800 years ago 1823 4. Answer. a) More than a century b) He wants to send Christmas greetings to his friends c) 800 years ago d) an American professor Clement Clarke Moore e) On the description of Saint Nicolas in that poem.

(217) - Controls and corrects. - Listen to the teacher. 3. Consolidation: (2') - Reading comprehension about Chrismas - Revision grammar point 4. Homework: (1') - Read, answer questions, translation the text. - Do exercise 1 on page 76 in workbook. - Read and prepare “Unit 13: Write”. ********************************************************* Date of prepare: ……………………… Class 8A.Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Class 8B.Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Period 84. Unit 13: FESTIVALS (Cont’) Write. I. AIMS 1. Knowledge - By the end of the lesson, students can complete the report and practice writing about a festival. - Vocabulary: Revision vocabulary about festivals - Grammar: Revision 2. Skills - Practice writing about a festival. 3. Attitude - Know more about culture, people, country. Then love their country. II.TEACHING AIDS 1. Teacher: Text book, plan. 2. Students: Text books, notebooks, pens. III. PROCEDURES 1. Check the old lesson: (5') - Call some students say what they prepare for Tet. 2. New lesson: - Introduce the new leson (1’).

(218) Teacher’s activities I. Warm up (2') - Have you ever seen ricecooking festival? - What do they do in the rice- cooking? - Are you intersting in contest? II. Presentation (8’) * Pre-writing - Ask students to look at the picture on page 126 and answer ? How many teams are there? ? What are they doing? ? According to dialogue on page 121 how many competitions are there in the rice cooking contest? - Asks students to read the paragraph and complete it.. Students’activites. Contents. - Listen and answer. - Look at and answer. 1. Complete the report. - Read and complete. - Call on students to read - Answer aloud - Corrects and introduces the - Copy down situation. * While-writing - Asks students to practice - Practice writing a simmilar report. - Guide students answer - Answer questions - Ask students to match their - Listen and match answer into a report using adverbs: such as, after, before.... 1) rice-cooking 2) one 3) water-fetching 4) run 5) water 6) traditional 7) bamboo 8) six 9) separate 10) added 2. Write.

(219) - Asks some students to read - Read their writing - Corrects - Correct and write down. * Post-writing - Asks students to check - Check their partner's writing - Asks some students to read - Read aloud their writing. - Corrects - Listen to the teacher 3. Consolidation: (1') - Some festivals in Viet Nam - Report festivals 4. Homework: (1') - Report a festival you’ve joined. In Viet Nam, Tet Trung Thu and the Mid-Autumn Festival is one of the most popular families celebrate. It is held on the 15th day of the 8th lunar month. Tet Trung Thu is a specially occasion for parents to express their love to their children; therefore, it is also called the children Festival. On this day, children often parade in the streets, while singing and carrying colorful star lanterns of difference sizes. They also perform traditional Viet Nam dances for adults and take part in contests for prizes. At night, family member get together and eat Banh Trung Thu, a special kind for moon cakes, which is traditionally very rich in taste. I think this is a very speacial occation for children to play & enjoy on a variety of activites. Moerever, they would understand more about Vietnamese traditonal..

(220) - Read and prepare “Unit 13: Languge Focus”. ************************************************** Date of prepare: ……………………… Class 8A.Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Class 8B.Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Period 85. Unit 13: FESTIVALS (Cont’) Language focus. I. AIMS 1. Knowledge - By the end of the lesson, students can review and practice the passive voice, compound words. - Vocabulary: Revision - Grammar: Passive voice, compound words 2. Skills - Practice doing exercises. 3. Attitude - Know more about culture, people, country and love their country. II.TEACHING AIDS 1. Teacher: Text book, plan. 2. Students: Text books, notebooks, pens. III. PROCEDURES 1. Check the old lesson: - No check 2. New lesson: - Introduce the new leson (1’). Teacher’s activities I. Warm up: (5') Palnisium - Explains how to do then ask students to practice. - Controls and corrects.. II. Revision:(7'). Ss' activites - Practice in groups - Listen to the teacher. Contents do - done play - played meet - met cut - cut teach - taught …….

(221) - Asks students to repeat the form and the use of the structures + Passive voice + Compound words. III. Practice:(30') - Asks students to do exercise 1: - Asks some students to practice - Corrects and give the right answers. - Explains how to do exercise 2 - Asks students to do exercise 2 - Asks some pairs to practice - Controls and corrects. - Explains how to do exercise 3 - Asks students to do exercise 3 - Asks some students read aloud their answers - Controls and correct if there is any mistake. 3. Consolidation: (2') - Past participle. - Repeat. Listen and copy. - Listen and do exercise - Practice. I. Revision: 1. Passive voice S + Be +VpII 2. Compound words Compound noun = noun + Ving Ex: A story-telling competition. II. Practice: 1. Ex1-p128. - Copy. - Listen - Do exercise. a) were performed b) was decorated c) is made d) will be held e) was awarded f) was written 2. Ex2-128. - Practice - Copy. - Listen - Do ex - Read aloud - Listen and copy down. 1) jumbled 2) broken 3) broken 4) scattered 5) pulled 3. Ex3-p130. a) It's a fire-making contest b) It's a bull-fighting festival c) It's a car-making industry d) It's a flower-arranging contest e) It's a rice-exporting country f) It's a clothes-washing machine.

(222) - Present participle; - Would/ Do you mind....? 4. Homework: (1') - Do the exercises again. - Prepare: Unit 13: Language focus (cont’) ************************************************* Date of prepare: ……………………… Class 8A.Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Class 8B.Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Period 86. Unit 13: FESTIVALS (Cont’) Language focus (p2). I. AIMS 1. Knowledge - By the end of the lesson, students can review and practice the reported speech. - Vocabulary: Revision - Grammar: Reported speech. 2. Skills - Practice doing exercises. 3. Attitude - Know more about culture, people, country and love their country. II.TEACHING AIDS 1. Teacher: Text book, plan. 2. Students: Text books, notebooks, pens. III. PROCEDURES 1. Check the old lesson: - No check 2. New lesson: - Introduce the new leson (1’) Teacher’s activities I. Warm-up (4’) Palnisium - Explains how to do then ask students to practice. - Controls and corrects.. Ss' activites. Contents. - Practice in groups - Listen to the teacher. go - went read - read sit - sat stay - stayed write - written ……. II. Revision:(7') - Asks students to repeat the. - Repeat. Listen and copy. I. Revision: * Reported speech..

(223) form and the use of the structure + Reported speech. III. Practice:(30') - Asks students to do exercise 4 - Asks some students to read their answer aloud - Controls ands corrects if necessary. - Listen and do - Read aloud - Listen and write in the notebook.. - Listen and do - Asks students to do exercise: 1. ‘I’m a student’ Lan said. 2. ‘I’m living London now’ John said 3. ‘You are my best friends’ Hoa said to us. - Asks some students to read their answer aloud - Controls ands corrects if necessary. Lời nói gián tiếp la lời nói tường thuật lại ý của người nói ( không cần phải dùng đúng từ của người nói) Eg: Tom said, ‘I’m feeling ill.’ => Tom said (that) he was feeling ill. - Change tense and adv/ articles II. Practice: 4. Ex4-p130 a) He said he was a plumber b) He said he could fix the faucets c) He said the pipes were broken d) He said that nwe pipes were very expensive e) He said I had pay him then Ex:. - Read aloud - Listen and write in the notebook.. 1. Lan said that she was a student 2. John said he was living in London then. 3. She told us that we were her best friends.. 3. Consloidation: (2') - Reported speech 4. Homework: (1') - Do the exercises again. - Prepare: Unit 14: “Getting started - Listen and read. *****************************************************.

(224) Date of prepare: ……………………… Class 8A.Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Class 8B.Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Period 87. REVISION. I. AIMS 1. Knowledge - By the end of the lesson, students can review and practice the grammar structures and vocabularies they’ve learn. - Vocabulary: Revision - Grammar: Revision. 2. Skills - Practice doing exercises. 3. Attitude - Know more about culture, people, country and love their country. II.TEACHING AIDS 1. Teacher: Text book, plan. 2. Students: Text books, notebooks, pens. III. PROCEDURES 1. Check the old lesson: - No check 2. New lesson: - Introduce the new leson (1’) Teacher’s activities Ss' activites Contents I. Warm up: (4') - Ask ss some questions: + How are you today? - Listen and + What is the weather like answer. today? …………………. II. Revision:(7') - Asks students to repeat the form and the use of the structure + Compound noun + Reported speech. - Repeat. Listen and copy. I. Revision: * Compound noun Compound noun = noun + Ving Eg: water-fetching rice-exporting * Reported speech. Lời nói gián tiếp la lời nói.

(225) III. Practice:(30') - Asks students to do exercise 3 in workbook. - Listen and do - Asks some students to read their answer aloud - Read aloud - Controls ands corrects if necessary - Listen and write in the notebook.. - Asks students to do exercise: 1. “I can’t go out after 8:00 p.m” Hoa said 2. “ We are decorating our Chritsmas tree” Minh said 3. “I must go home now” he said to his friends - Asks some students to read their answer aloud - Controls ands corrects if necessary. 3. Consolidation: (2') - Reported speech 4. Homework: (1') - Do the exercises again.. tường thuật lại ý của người nói ( không cần phải dùng đúng từ của người nói) Eg: Hoa said, “ I’m having a party at my flat” Hoa said (that) she was having a party at her flat - Change tense and adv/ articles II. Practice:. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.. - Listen and do. - Read aloud - Listen and write in the notebook.. 1. Hoa said she couldn’t go out after 8:00 p.m 2. Minh said they were decorating their Christmas tree. 3. He told his friends that he had to go home then..

(226) - Prepare: The written test No 4 ******************************************************. TRƯỜNG PTDTBT THCS LŨNG CÚ TỔ XÃ HỘI Date of prepare: 18/03/2016 I. AIMS 1. Knowledge. THE WRITTEN TEST (No2) School year: 2015 - 2016 Time: 45 minutes Subject: English 8 Week 31 Period 88 Date of test: 23/03/2016.

(227) - By the end of the lesson, students’ll be able to know more about grammar structures, vocabulary they have learned from unit 12 to unit 13. 2. Skills - Practice listening, reading, writing and doing exercises. 3. Attitude - Have more consciousness in learning English and like subject. II. TEACHING AIDS 1. Teacher: Photo test 2. Students: School things. III. PROCEDURES. 1. Matrix: Vận dụng Cấp độ Tên Chủ đề. I. Listening. Số câu. Nhận biết. TN. Thông hiểu. TL TN. TL. Cấp độ thấp. TN. TL. Cấp độ cao. TN. TL. Cộng. Fill in the blanks 4 câu. 4 câu.

(228) 2,0 đ. Số điểm Tỉ lệ %. Answer the questions. II. Reading. Số câu Số điểm Tỉ lệ % III. Language focus Số câu Số điểm Tỉ lệ %. 2,0 đ 20 %. 4 câu 4,0 đ Circle the best option 4 câu 2,0 đ. 4 câu 2,0 đ 20 % Rewrite the sentences. IV. Writing. 2 câu 2,0 điểm. Số câu Số điểm Tỉ lệ Tổng số câu Tổng số điểm Tỉ lệ %. Grade 8. 4 câu 4,0 đ 40 %. 4 câu 2,0 điểm 20 %. 4 câu 2,0 điểm 20 %. 4 câu 4,0 điểm 40%. 2 câu 2,0 điểm 20%. 2 câu 2,0 đ 20 % 14 câu 10 điểm 100 %. THE WRITTEN TEST (No2) School year: 2015 - 2016 Time: 45 minutes. I. Listening. Listen and fill in the blanks. (2,0 pts) This vacation is (1)………….. .The island is (2)…………….and the weather is hot and (3)…………….every day. I arrived on Saturday morning and went to the beach immediately. I took a long (4)……………and then sunbathed all afternoon, and unluckily I got sunburnt! After that, I sat under my umbrella and listened to the CD you bought me for my birthday. II. Reading. Read the passage then answer the questions. (4,0 pts).

(229) The rice-cooking festival was held in the communal house yard about one km away from the river. There were three competitions: water-fetching, fire-making and ricecooking. In the water-fetching contest, one person from each team had to run to the river to get the water. In the fire-making contest, two team members had to make a fire in the traditional way. They tried to rub pieces of bamboo together to make the fire. Then people from each team took part in the rice-cooking contest. They had to separate the rice from the husk and then cook the rice. After the three contests, all the points were added and Thon Trieu team won the grand prize. Questions: 1. What’s the name of festival ? 2. Where did each team get the water ? 3. What was the traditional way of making a fire ? 4. What did they do before they cook the rice ? III. Language focus. Choose the best answer. (2,0 pts) 1. Vietnam is a …………country. A. export-coffee B. coffee-export C. coffee-exporting D. exporting-coffee 2. Wine……………from grapes. A. made B. is made C. makes D. is done 3. A lot of tall buildings…………….built in the city recently. A. have been B. were being C. are being D. are 4. I’d love to, …………… I am having an appointment tonight. A. because B. but C. while D. reason is IV. Writing. Rewrite the sentences using reported speech and passive voice. (2,0 pts) 1. Viet Nam exports rice to many countries. ………………………………………………………………… 2. They will use pieces of wood to make the fire. …………………………………………………………………. 3. Answers and marks. Câu. I.. Listening. Đáp án 1. wonderful 2. beautiful 3. sunny. Điểm 0,5 0,5 0,5.

(230) II. Reading. 4. swim * Tapescrip: This vacation is wonderful.The island is beautiful and the weather is hot and sunny every day. I arrived on Saturday morning and went to the beach immediately. I took a long swim and then sunbathed all afternoon, and unluckily I got sunburnt! After that, I sat under my umbrella and listened to the CD you bought me for my birthday.. 0,5. 1. It’s rice-cooking festival 2. Each team gets the water at the river about one kilometer away. 3. The traditional way of making a fire is rub pieces of bamboo together. 4. They have to separate the rice from the husk before cook the rice.. 1,0 1,0. 1. 2. 3. 4.. 0,5 0,5 0,5 0,5. III. Language focus. IV. Writing. C B A B. 1,0 1,0. 1. Rice is exported to many countries by Viet Nam 2. Pieces of wood will be used to make the fire.. 1,0 1,0. Ngày... tháng... năm .... Ngày...tháng... năm.... Ngày... tháng... năm.... Xác nhận của Phó Hiệu Trưởng. Duyệt của tổ. Người ra đề. Date of prepare: ……………………… Class 8A.Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Class 8B.Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Period 89. Unit 14: wonders of the world Getting started - Listen and read.

(231) I. AIMS 1. Knowledge - By the end of the lesson, students can talk about some wonders of the world. - Vocabulary: Wonder, guess, correct, clue, Asia... - Grammar: Question words + to infini 2. Skills - Practice listening, reading the dialogue. Complete the summary 3. Attitude - Love their country and other countries. II.TEACHING AIDS 1. Teacher: Text book, plan, cassette, tape and picture. 2. Students: Text books, notebooks, pens. III. PROCEDURES 1. Check the old lesson: - No check 2. New lesson: - Introduce the new leson (1’) Teacher’s activities I. Warm up:(4') + Getting started” - Explains, introduces the pictures and situation - Call some students give the answers - Controls and corrects. II. Presentation:(37') - Asks some questions. ? Do you often play language games? ? What games do you play? When? - Introduce the dialogues and read ? What is the game in the dialogue? How to play it? - Give answer and explain some new words. Ss' activities. Contents 1. Getting started. - Look at the pictures and practice matching. - Give the ansers - Listen and write down. a) Pyramids b) Sydney Opera House c) Stonehenge. - Listen and answer. 2. Listen and read. - Listen. - Answer. Listen a. New words and copy down - Wonder (n): - guess (v):.

(232) - correct (v): - clue (n): - Asia (n): - Listen and - Read and have students repeat repeat - Listen and - Explain grammar copy. - Asks some pairs to practice reading. - Call some groups read the dialogue before the class. - Pay attention to their pronunciation and correct if there is any mistake. - Ask students to read the dialogue again and complete the summary by filling the blank with the most suitable word. - Call on students answer - Correct if there is any mistake.. - Call some students read the summary has completed. - Practice in pairs - Read aloud. b. Grammar I don't know how to play it I don't know what to do first => Question words + to infi... c. Practice the dialogue with two classmates. - Listen to the teacher - Read the 2. Complete the summary. conversation and Use words from the do exercise 2 dialogue. - Answer - Correct and write down. 1) game 2) place 3)clue 4) Viet Nam 5) America 6) Golden 7) right 8) was. - Read aloud before the class. 3. Consolidation: (2') - Question words + to infini 4. Homework: (1') - Practice conversation again - Do exercise 1 on page 84 in workbook. - Prepare: Unit 14 (Speak - Listen). ************************************************ Date of prepare: ……………………… Class 8A.Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Class 8B.Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Period 90. Unit 14: wonders of the world (Cont’) Speak - Listen.

(233) I. AIMS 1. Knowledge - By the end of the lesson, students will be able to know more wonders of the world such as: Eiffel Tower, Big Ben.... - Vocabulary: Famous places, jungle, Crystal-clear water, Coral Sea, Snorkel Coconut Palm Inn... - Grammar: Yes/ No questions Reported speech of yes/ no questions 2. Skills - Practice asking and answering the questions. Correct the mistakes. 3. Attitude - Love their country and other countries. II.TEACHING AIDS 1. Teacher: Text book, plan, cassette, tape. 2. Students: Text books, notebooks, pens. III. PROCEDURES 1. Check the old lesson: (5') - Call some students read the dialogue. 2. New lesson: - Introduce the new leson (1’) Teacher’s activities I. Warm up:(4') “Networks” - Explains ands asks students to practice - Control and correct. II. Presentation (32') 1. Speak * Pre-speaking - Introduces the list and the table and tell the places that you know - Explain some places.. Ss' activities. Contents. - Listen to the teacher and practice - Listen. - Listen and tell - Listen to the teacher and write down. I. Speak 1. Think of your famous places.... - The Great Wall of China: - Empire State Building: - Petronas Twin Towers: - Great Barrier Reef: - Hue Citadel: - Ha Long Bay: - Phong Nha cave: - Eiffel Tower:.

(234) * While-speaking - Guide: Have students write Yes/ No questions about the places such as example in book. - Have students ask their friends and compare the answers - Call some practice before the class. - Introduce the way to change the direct into indirect sentences with Yes/ No question.. - Do as teacher requested. - Mount Everest: - Big Ben: 2. Talk about your classmates' answers with your partner.. - Listen and practice - Practice before the class. - Listen and write down - Direct: I said to/ asked Hoa: “Is Eiffel Tower in Germany?” - Indirect: I asked Hoa if/ whether Eiffel Tower was in Germany. => S + V-ed + O if/ whether S + V + O. - if/ whether: xem là * Note: Những thay đổi về đại từ, thì của động từ giống như trong câu khẳng định. Guide: In oder to understand more about this grammar point. You practice in group of three, report the activity you have done. - Call some students practice before the class. * Post-speaking "Who says?" - Explains how to play - Gives some statement. Ex: - "Do you like music, Huong?" ⇒Tuan asked me if I liked. - Listen and practice.. - Practice in pairs. - Listen to the teacher - Practice. A: Is Great Wall of China the longest structure in the world? B: Yes, it is. A: Is Ha Long Bay a World Heritage Site? B: Yes, it is. ......

(235) music ..... - Controls and corrects. 2. Listen * Pre-listening - Have students look at part listen and introduces some new words - Have students read the advertisement for general information. - Guide: You will hear a conversation about the trip to Qeensland. You listen to the tape and find out and correct the mistakes in the advertisement. * While-listening -Turns on the tape (3 times) - Asks some students to tell their answers. - Corrects if there is any mistake - Turns on the tape again to check. * Post-listening - Asks students to reread the advertisement - Controls and corrects.. - Correct - Look at and copy down. - Practice. II. Listen *New words - jungle: - Crystal-clear water: - Coral Sea: - Snorkel:. - Listen to the teacher. - Listen to the tape - Answer - Listen and write down southern ⇒far north inn ⇒ Hotel jungle ⇒ rainforest - Listen and 6824 3927 ⇒ 6924 check - Reread - Listen to the teacher. 3. Consolidation: (2') - Repeat the main content of the lesson - Yes/ No questions - Reported speech of yes-no questions 4. Homework: (1') - Practice again - Do exercise 2 on page 85 in workbook. - Prepare: Unit 14 “Read”..

(236) ***************************************************** Date of prepare: ……………………… Class 8A.Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Class 8B.Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Period 91. Unit 14: wonders of the world (Cont’) Read. I. AIMS 1. Knowledge - By the end of the lesson, students will be to know seven wonder of the world with a lot of names of places such as: Hanging gardens of Babylon, Statue of Zeus.... - Vocabulary: Ancient Greece, compile Royal capital city, Angkor Wat, Buddhist religion - Grammar: Passive voice (Revision). 2. Skills - Practice listening, reading comprehension with the kind of exercise: Complete the sentences. 3. Attitude - Love their country and other countries. II.TEACHING AIDS 1. Teacher: Text book, plan 2. Students: Text books, notebooks, pens. III. PROCEDURES 1. Check the old lesson: (5') - Call a student to do exercise 2 in workbook. 2. New lesson: - Introduce the new leson (1’) Teacher’s activities Ss' activities I. Warm up:(4') “Guessing game” - Asks some questions - Listen and * What is it? answer 1. It is 4500 miles long 2. It's the only man-made thing that can be seen from the space 3. It is in China ⇒ Great Wall of China - Controls and corrects - Listen and practice II. Presentation (32’). Contents.

(237) * Pre-reading - Guide: In today's lesson, we will learn more about the world heriteges. - Introduces some new words. * While-reading - Read text (twice) - Asks some students to read the text - Explain garmmmar. - Listen to the teacher - Listen and write down. - Listen to the teacher - Read the text. 3. Consolidation: (2') - Worder of the worlds - Passive 4. Homework: (1') - Practice again. - Ancient Greece: - Compile: - Hanging Garden of Babylon: - Statue of Zeus: - Tai Mahal: - Angkor Wat: - Buddhist religious center: - Royal capital city:. - Copy. - Controls and corrects the asks - Practice students to read the text again and practice doing exercise 1 - Asks some students to read - Read their answers - Corrects - Listen and write down. * Post-reading - Asks studens to translate into Vietnamese. - Controls and corrects. 1. New words. - Read and translate. - Listen to the teacher. 2. Modal sentences Passive form Ex: The temple was built around the year 11000 Angkor Wat should be known as a worder 3. Complete sentences. a - C: the Pyramid of Cheops b - A: Hindu c - D: was part of a royal Khmer city a long time ago. d - B: chose Phnom Penh as the new capital.

(238) - Do exercises 3, 4on pages 85, 86 in workbook. - Prepare Unit 14: Write. ***************************************************** Date of prepare: ………………………… Class 8A.Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Class 8B.Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Period 92. Unit 14: wonders of the world (Cont’) Write. I. AIMS 1. Knowledge - By the end of the lesson, students will be to write a letter to a friend to tell about your trip. - Vocabulary: Canyon (n), park ranger (n), guide hike... - Grammar: Verb + to-infini 2. Skills - Practice writing a letter to a friend to tell about your trip. 3. Attitude - Love their country and other countries. II.TEACHING AIDS 1. Teacher: Text book, plan 2. Students: Text books, notebooks, pens. III. PROCEDURES 1. Check the old lesson: (5') - Call a student reread the passage. 2. New lesson: - Introduce the new leson (1’) Teacher’s activities Ss' activities Contents I. Warm up: (4') - Ask students: - Practice How are you to day? What is the weather like?. II. Presentation (32’) * Pre-writing - Listen to the - Guide: Today we will learn teacher how to write a letter to a friend telling him or her about your last trip to a famous place. Firstly, you read Tims letter to. 1. Complete the letter..

(239) his friend - Read and find - Ask students to read Tim's out letter sent to Hoa then find out new words - Ask students to read the letter again and insert the letters of the missing sentences - Call on ss answer - Correct and explain grammar. - Explain structure - Ask ss to make sentences * While-writing - Ask ss to base onTim's letter. Write a letter to your friend telling him or her about your last trip to a famous place. Use form + Place + Distance from city + How to get there + Sights + Weather + How you feel - Call on students to read their writing - Correct. a. New words - canyon (n): - park ranger (n): - guide hike (n): - sealeve (n): - origanal habitants (n): - Read and insert b. Complete. - Answer - Correct and copy. - Listen and write - Make sentences - Listen and write. - Read the writing - Correct and write down. 1- C: I hope you are studying hard for your exams next week. 2 - B: The Grand Canyon is part of Grand Canyon National Park and it was formed by the Colorado River over millions of years. 3 - D: He also talked about the original inhabitants who lived there during the Stone Age. 4 - A: That is all I have time to tell you about. c. Grammar Verbs + to-infi decide/ want/ start... +V-infi Ex: I didn't want to leave 2. Write a letter to a friend.. Dear Na, How are you? I hope you are studying hard for your next term. My class has just come.

(240) back from a trip to Phong Nha cave, a world Heritagesite in VN. It's about 500km from HN and it tooks us 10 hours to get there by train. The next day, we got up very early and went ot Phong Nha cave. The one we enjoyed most is the guide tour into big cave. Althougt it was a summer day, it was very cold and dark inside. The guide showed us manificient caves. We took many photos. In the afternoon we came in Nhat Le beach. It was realy fantastic. We felt very happy after the trip. I enclose a photo that I took during the trip. I hope you like it. Iam looking for ward to hearing from you soon. Your friend. Po * Post-writing - Asks some question about their writing. - Corrects. - Asnswer - Listen to the teacher. 3. Consolidation: (2') - Repeat the main content of the lesson: - Verb + to infi 4. Homework: (1') - Practice writing a similar letter - Prepare Unit 14: Language Focus. ************************************************** Date of prepare: ……………………… Class 8A.Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Class 8B.Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Period 93. Unit 14: wonders of the world (Cont’) Language focus.

(241) I. AIMS 1. Knowledge - By the end of the lesson, students will be to review and practice the passive voice, reported speech with if and whether, question words before to infi, verbs + to infi... - Vocabulary: Revision - Grammar: Passive voice, reported speech with if and whether, question words before to infi, verbs + to infi... 2. Skills - Practice listening, reading and doing exercises. 3. Attitude - Love their country and other countries. II.TEACHING AIDS 1. Teacher: Text book, plan 2. Students: Text books, notebooks, pens. III. PROCEDURES 1. Check the old lesson: - No check 2. New lesson: - Introduce the new leson (1’) Teacher’s activities I. Warm up:(4') Palnisium - Explains how to do then ask students to practice. - Controls and corrects.. Students' activites. Contents. - Practice in groups do - done play - played meet - met cut - cut - Listen to the teach - taught teacher ……. II. Revision:(10') - Asks students to repeat the form and the use of the structures + Passive voice + Indirect question with if and whether + Question words before toinfi... + Verb + to infi.... - Repeat. Listen and copy. III. Practice:(27'). - Listen and do. I. Revision: 1. Passive voice S + be +VpII 2. Indirect question with if and whether 3. Question words before to- infi... 4. Verb + to infi....

(242) - Asks students to do exercise1 - Asks some students to read their answers before the class - Corrects and give the right answers. exercise - Read aloud - Copy in the notebook. - Listen - Explains how to do exercise 2 - Do ex - Asks students to do exercise2 - Practice - Asks some pairs to practice - Copy - Controls and corrects. - Listen - Explains how to do exercise 3 - Do ex - Asks students to do exercise3 - Practice - Asks some students to practice - Copy - Controls and corrects. - Asks students to do exercise4 - Asks some pairs to practice - Controls and corrects. - Do exercise - Practice - Copy. II. Practice: 1. Ex1-p 136 a) was completed b) was contructed c) was designed d) was presented e) was reached 2. Ex2-p 136 b- Nhi asked Nga if/ whetther it was far from HN c- Nhi asked Nga if/ whether my son was in QN province d- Nhi asked Nga if many people lived at My Son e- Nhi asked Nga whether many tourists visited My Son f- Nhi asked Nga if she wanted to visited to visit My Son one day 3. Ex3-p 137. b) Nga told Nhi where to get.... c) Nga pointed out where to buy..... d) Nga advised Nhi how to go...... e) Nga told Nhi what to do... 4. Ex4-p 137 1. started to jog 2. might go 3. began to gether 4. started to rain 5. tried to reach 6. decided to continoue 7. couldn't get.

(243) 3. Consolidation: (2') - Repeat: + Passive voice + Indirect question with if and whether + Question 4. Homework: (1') - Do the exercises again. - Make sentences ********************************************** Date of prepare: ……………………… Class 8A.Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Class 8B.Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Period 94. CORRECT THE TEST (No 4) I. AIMS 1. Knowledge - By the end of the lesson, Ss will be to correct the mistakes in their tests. - Vocabulary: - Grammar: 2. Skills - Practice doing exercises 3. Attitude - Like subject and more consciousness in learning English. II.TEACHING AIDS 1. Teacher: Text book, plan. 2. Students: Text books, notebooks, pens. III. PROCEDURES 1. Check the old lesson - No check 2. New lesson - Introduce the new leson (1’) Teacher’s activities Ss’ activities I.Warm up:(5') - Ask ss some questions. - Answer the ? How are you today? questions ? Are you worried about your test? ? Is good or bad? II. Presentation:(37'). Contents.

(244) - Remark the written test + Total: + Good: + Fair: + Poor: - Pay & correct the test.. I. Listening - Read the listening again to students check the answers - Give correct answers and marks II. Reading - Ask students to read the text and answer again. - Correct mistakes. III. Language focus. - Explain each sentence and say reason choosing.. - Give correct answers. - Listen to the teacher. 1. Remark the test + Total: + Good: + Fair: + Poor: - Look at the test 2. Correct the test. & correct mistakes. - Listen and check the answer - Write. 1. wonderful 2. beautiful 3. sunny 4. swim II. Reading: Read the passage and answer the questions follow - Read again and 1. It’s rice-cooking festival answer 2. Each team gets the water at - Correct the river about 1 km away. 3. The traditional way of making a fire is rub pieces of bamboo together. 4. They have to separate the rice from the husk before cook the rice. III. Language focus: Circle the best answer (A, B, C or D to complete the following sentences - Listen and 1. C correct 2. B 3. A 4. B - Write. IV. Writing - Guide students to write sentences. - Give correct answers. - Rewrite - Listen.. 3. Remember: (2'). I. Listening: Listen to the passage and fill in the blanks. IV. Writing: Rewrite the following sentences, Using reported speech: 1. Rice is exported to many countries by Viet Nam 2. Pieces of wood will be used to make the fire..

(245) - Retell contents of the lesson 4. Home work: (1'). - Prepare: Unit 15 (Getting started - Listen and read). ********************************************** Date of prepare: ……………………… Class 8A.Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Class 8B.Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Period 95. Unit 15: computers Getting started - Listen and read. I. AIMS 1. Knowledge - By the end of the lesson, students will be to talk about computers and its benefits. - Vocabulary: Printer (n), connect (v), socket (n), manual (n)... - Grammar: S + haven't/ hasn't + PII + O + yet Have/has +S + PII + O + yet? 2. Skills - Practice listening, reading the dialogue. Check the boxes. 3. Attitude - Love their country, culture, people and other countries in the world. II.TEACHING AIDS 1. Teacher: Text book, plan, cassette, tape and picture. 2. Students: Text books, notebooks, pens. III. PROCEDURES 1. Check the old lesson: - No check 2. New lesson: - Introduce the new leson (1’) Teacher’s activities I. Warm up:(5') + ''Getting started” - Give a poster of a computer and ask students What's this? Do oyu often use computer? Is it helpful for you? - Ask students to make a list of how computers can help us - Call on students read a loud. S's activites - Look at and answer. - Work in groups and write - Answer. Contents I. Getting started. - save time.

(246) and correct. II. Presentation:(32') - Introduce the conversation beteween Nam and his father - Read the dialogue - Introduces some new words. - Look at and listen - Listen and read silently - Listen and copy. - Ask students to practice new words - Check vocabulary by playing game 'Rub out and remember, - Guide students to read the dialogue - Explain grammar. - Practice. - Asks some pairs to practice reading. - Call some pairs practice with a partner. - Ask ss some questions about the dialogue ? What's the mater with the printer? ? Has Nam turned it on yet? ? Why didn't Nam use manual? - Revise Fact and Opinion by 2 example Ex: Fact: I learn English. - Practice in pairs - Practice. - Play game - Listen and repeat - Listen and copy down. - can keep information. - help us learn interstingly and more quickly - be convinient ........ II. Listen and read. a. New words - Printer (n): - Connect (v): - Socket (n): - Manual (n): - Be under guarantee:. b. Grammar Present perfect with 'yet' and 'already, +Already: đã từng S + have/ has + already + PII +O Ex: I've already been to HN + Yet: chưa, vẫn chưa (In nagative & question) - S + haven't/ hasn't + PII + O + yet - Have/ has + S + PII + O + yet? Ex: Have you finished your homework yet? 1. Practice with a partner.. - Listen and answer. - Listen. 2. Fact or Opinion? Check (v) the boxes. Ex: Fact: I learn English.

(247) Opinion: E is difficult - Asks students to read the dialogue again and do exercise2 - Call on ss answer - Correct. III. Practice:(5') - Asks students to play "fact or opinion" 1. Computers store information 2. Computer are very helpful 3. Computers are very quickl in giving answers to our questions 4. Computers help us learn interstingly 5. I have a computer - Controls and corrects. Opinion: E is difficult - Read and do exercise 2 - Answer - Correct and write. - Play game. - Correct. a) Fact b) Opinion c) Opinion d) Fact e) Fact f) Opinion III. Practice. 1. Fact 2. Opinion 3. Fact 4. Opinion 5. Fact. 3. Consolidation: (2') - Fact and opinion - Present perfect with ‘yet’ and ‘already’. 4. Homework: (1') - Learn by heart grammar and do exercise 1 on page 90- exercise 4 on page 92 in workbook. - Prepare: Speak - Listen. ********************************************** Date of prepare: ……………………… Class 8A.Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Class 8B.Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Period 96. Unit 15: computers (Cont’) Speak I. AIMS.

(248) 1. Knowledge - By the end of the lesson, students will be to speak about express and repond to opinions about the activities in the pictures. - Vocabulary: - Flow chat, circle, triangles..... - Grammar: - Give opinions and respond to the opinions. 2. Skills - Practice speaks about express and repond to opinions about the activities in the pictures. 3. Attitude - Love their country, culture, people and other countries in the world. II.TEACHING AIDS 1. Teacher: Text book, plan, cassette, tape. 2. Students: Text books, notebooks, pens. III. PROCEDURES 1. Check the old lesson: (5') - Call students to read the dialogue. 2. New lesson: - Introduce the new leson (1’) Teacher’s activities I. Warm up:(4') - Ask students some question ? Do you often give and respond to opinions? - In today's lesson we will learn further about this topic II. Presentation (32’) * Pre-speaking - Introduce: In daily life, we always have to give and. Ss' activites. Contents. - Listen and answer - Listen to the teacher. - Listen to the teacher.. respond to opinions. We will learn futher about this topic in today's lesson. - Introduces the list and the - Listen and copy table and explains. down. I. Speak 1. Work with a partner.... + Opinion: - I like... - I don't like... - I think... - I feel... - I don't believe.. + Agreement: - So do I - I agree - You're right.

(249) - Ask ss to look at the pictures - Look at and say on page 139 and say what poeple do - Ask ss to read adjs in box - Read and copy and explain some new words. * While-speaking - Now you work in pairs, use the adjs and pictures to express and respond to opinions about the activites you have mentioned above - Asks students to practice in pairs. - Call some pairs to practice - Corrects. * Post-speaking - Computer have alot of benefits however, computers sometimes go wrong dueto technical proplems. What are. -Work in pairs. - Neither do I + Degree of agreement: - I agree, but... - Yes, but on the other hand + Disagreement: - I disagree - I can't agree with you - No, I think ... Ex: I think computers are useful - So do I - I disagree i think they are unnecessary a. New words: - entertaining (adj): - time-consuming (adj): - challenging (adj): - delicious: - amusing: b. Practice. - Practice - Present - Correct and write a) I think driving a car can be dangerous - I agree, but there won't be a problem if you are careful. - I think learning to drive a car is challenger. - You are right, it is difficult to get used to driving in the streets especially at rush hours b) - I don't like reading comic books. They are so boring. - Neither do I.... - Listen and 2. Read dialogue. Then make prepare. Answer similar dialogues.

(250) the proplem? - Explain some new words in the box. - Asks students to read the dialogue - Ask students to make similar dialogue. - Controls and corrects.. - Listen and copy. - printer: - monitor: - screen: - mouse: - adjust the knob:. - Practice in pairs - Make similar dialogue - Correct. * Make similar dialogues. - I'm having problem with my monitor. - What's wrong? - The screen is too dark. I think it's broken. - I don't think so. Let me see. You should adjust the knob. - Oh! Thank you. I didn't know that.. 3. Consolidation: (2') - Give opinions and respond to the opinions - How to get a drink from a machine 4. Homework: (1') - Learn grammar and do exercise 2 on page 92 in workbook. - Prepare: Listen. Date of prepare: ……………………… Class 8A.Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Class 8B.Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Period 97. Unit 15: computers (Cont’) Listen. I. AIMS 1. Knowledge - By the end of the lesson, students will be to understand about the process to make paper - Vocabulary: - pulp vat, conveyor... - Grammar: 2. Skills - Practice listening, reading the dialogue. Complete the chart. 3. Attitude - Love their country, culture, people and other countries in the world. II.TEACHING AIDS.

(251) 1. Teacher: Text book, plan, cassette, tape. 2. Students: Text books, notebooks, pens. III. PROCEDURES 1. Check the old lesson: (5') - Call students to read the dialogue. 2. New lesson: - Introduce the new leson (1’) Teacher’s activities I. Warm up:(4') - Ask students some question ? Do you know how to make paper? - In today's lesson we will learn further about this topic II. Presentation (32’) * Pre-listening - Ask some questions ? Have you ever get a drink from a machine? ? Where do you often see them? - Ask students to look at the chart and tell me what you see in the chart. - Introduces some new words. - Introduces the chart and explains the requirement * While-listening - Read the listening (3 times) - Asks some students to tell their answers. - Corrects. - Turns on the tape again. Ss' activites. Contents. - Listen and answer - Listen to the teacher. - Listen and answer. I. Listen. - Look at the chart and answer - Listen and copy. - Look at and guess. 1. New words - Circle: - Triangles: - Oval: - Insert coins: - Press button:. - Listen and complete - Answer. 2. Listen. - Correct. Start → find a machine → Do you have a correct change? → Yes → What do you want to drink? → Lemon soda → Insert coins & press button →Take it. - Listen and check.

(252) * Post-listening True/ false 1. Computers programmers use flow chart to help people understand how events are sequenced. 2. Some shapes on the chart have a particular meaning. - Asks students to practice - Controls and corrects. - Do exercise in groups. - Answer - Correct. 1.T. 2.T. 3. Consolidation: (2') - Consolidate the main contents 4. Homework: (1') - Learn grammar and do exercise 2 on page 92 in workbook. - Prepare: Read. **********************************************. Date of prepare: ……………………… Class 8A.Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Class 8B.Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Period 98. Unit 15: computers (Cont’) Read I. AIMS 1. Knowledge - By the end of the lesson, students will be to read about computers and its benefits. - Vocabulary: Store information, send message, received information.... - Grammar: Revision: Passive voice and Present perfect 2. Skills - Practice reading about a library. 3. Attitude - Love their country, culture, people and other countries in the world. II.TEACHING AIDS 1. Teacher: Text book, plan. 2. Students: Text books, notebooks, pens. III. PROCEDURES.

(253) 1. Check the old lesson: (5') - Call a student to do exercise 2 in workbook. 2. New lesson: - Introduce the new leson (1’) Teacher’s activities Students'activities I. Warm up:(5') - Asks some questions - Listen and answer ? Where in the library do we store information? ? If we want to discuss something, how can we do? - Controls and corrects - Listen to the teacher. II. Presentation * Pre-reading - Introduce the reading - Read and introduces some new words. - Ask students to practice new words - Controls and corrects - Chek vocabulary by play game slap the board - Introduce modal sentences. * While-reading - Read the passage (twice) - Introduces some questions 1. What is the main idea of the passage?. Contents. - Listen to the teacher - Listen and write down. 1. New words - Store (v): - Send # receive: - Access (n): - Freshmen (n): - college campus(n): - skeptical (adj): - concern (n) (v): - Listen and read - impack (n): silently. - computer bullentin board - Listen and practice - restrict (n): - Play game - Listen and write down. - Read the text - Practice and and answer. 2. Modal sentences + Passive form: - Computer bulletin boards are used in the sameway + Present perfect - A library has recently opened..... 3. True or false.

(254) 2. Who would be interested in the reading? - Controls and corrects - Asks some students to read the text - Controls and corrects the asks students to read the text again and practice doing exercise 1 - Asks some students to read their answer - Corrects. - Listen - Read - Practice the text again and do exercise - Read aloud the answers - Listen and write down. - Practice. - Asks students to read the text again and practice doing exercise 2 - Asks some students to read - Read aloud their answers - Corrects - Write down. * Post-reading - Asks students to translate into Vietnamese. - Controls and corrects. a) T b) T d) F e) T 4. Answer. a) It doesn't have a library. b) All the information is available through the computer c) A computer and a telephone line. d) With a bulletin board on the internet, a great number of people can get access to and exchange information quickly. e) (student's opinion). - Practice and translate into Vietnamese - Listen to the teacher. 3. Consolidation: (2') - Vocabulary and grammar - Computers in colleges and universities 4. Homework: (1') - Learn by heart new words and read text again. - Do exercises 4, 5 on page 92, 93 in workbook. - Prepare: Unit 15: Write. *********************************************** Date of prepare: ………………………. c) T f) T.

(255) Class 8A.Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Class 8B.Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Period 99. Unit 15: computers (Cont’) Write. I. AIMS 1. Knowledge - By the end of the lesson, students will be to write instructions on how to use the printer. - Vocabulary: Paper input tray, monitor screen, power button, output path... - Grammar: Revision Command 2. Skills - Practice writing the instructions on how to use the printer. 3. Attitude - Love their country, culture, people and other countries in the world. II.TEACHING AIDS 1. Teacher: Text book, plan. 2. Students: Text books, notebooks, pens. III. PROCEDURES 1. Check the old lesson: - No check 2. New lesson: - Introduce the new leson (1’) Teacher’s activities I.Warm up:(5') “Questions and answer” - Asks some questions - Do you have a computer? - What do you often do with your computer? - Have you ever printed a document? - Controls and corrects. Ss'activities. Contents. - Students answer. - Listen to the teacher. II. Presentation * Pre-writing - Look at the - Ask students to look at the picture picture on page 142 - Matching - Introduces some new words by "matching". 1. Write a) paper input tray - 1. Giấy b) monitor screen - 2. Đường/ lối ra c) power button - 3. Ký hiệu d) icon - 4. Công tắc nguồn e) output path - 5. Khay đưa giấy vào.

(256) - Answer - Call on students answer - Listen and - Give correct answers write - Match pictures - Now you match these items with the items with the correct picture - Answer - Call on students to answer - Take note - Correct * While-writing - Asks students to use the pictures and cue words to practice writing. - Asks some students to read their writing. - Corrects.. - Practice writng. * Post-writing - Asks to arrange the instruction 1. Choose the amount of money you want to withdraw 2. Enter the PIN (Personal Identification Number) 3. Insert the card into the machine 4. Get money and the receipt - Call some students read aloud the answers - Corrects. - Play in groups. 3. Consolidation: (2'). - Read aloud their writing - Correct. f) paper - 6. Màn hình ⇒ a - 5, b - 6, c - 4, d - 3, e - 2, f -1 1. Match the words with the numbers in the pictures. ⇒ a - 3, b - 1, c - 6, d - 2, e - 4, f –5 2. Look at the pictures and the words. Write the intructions on how to use the printer. - Plug in the printer and turn on the power - Remove the old paper and load the new paper in the paper input tray. - Wait for the power button to flash - Have the pages appear on the computer screen. - Click the printer icon on the screen and wait for a few seconds. - The printed paper will get out from the output path in a minute.. 3-2-1- 4 - Read aloud - Listen to the teacher.

(257) - Repeat the main content of the lesson 4. Homework: (1') - Do exercise 7 on page 94 in workbook. - Prepare: Language Focus. ********************************************** Date of prepare: ……………………… Class 8A.Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Class 8B.Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Period 100. Unit 15: computers (Cont’) Language Focus I. AIMS 1. Knowledge - By the end of the lesson, students will be to review the present perfect. past simple tense. - Vocabulary: Revision - Grammar: Revision; Past simple tense; Present perfect 2. Skills - Practice doing exercises. 3. Attitude - Love their country, culture, people and other countries in the world. II.TEACHING AIDS 1. Teacher: Text book, plan. 2. Students: Text books, notebooks, pens. III. PROCEDURES 1. Check the old lesson: (5') - Call a student say about how to use the printers. 2. New lesson: - Introduce the new leson (1’) Teacher’s activities I. Warm up:(4') Matching - Explains how to do then ask students to practice. - Controls and corrects.. Ss' activities - Practice in groups - Listen to the teacher. II. Revision:(6') - Asks students to repeat - Repeat. the form and the use of present perfect, past simple.. Contents 1- go 3- see 5- make 7- be 9- meet. 2- met 4- went 6- made 8- was 10- saw. I. Revision: 1. Present perfect with yet and already.

(258) III. Practice:(27') - Explains and asks students to do exercise 1. - Asks some pairs to practice. - Corrects. - Practice in pairs - Practice - Listen and write. - Asks students to do exercise 2 - Asks some pairs to practice - Controls and corrects. - Practice in pairs - Practice as teacher requested - Lisen and take note. - Explains how to do then asks students to do exercise - Practice 3 - Asks some students to practice - Practice - Controls and corrects if there is any mistake. - Listen and write down. - S + have/ has + already + PII+ ... - S + haven't / hasn't + pII ... + yet - Have / Has + S + PII? 2. Past simple tense + S + V- ed/ irregular - S + didn't + V ? Did + S + V? ... *Note: The different between present perfect and past simple Ex: Tom has lost his key (The present result of action) Tom lost his key yesterday (The action in the past) II. Practice: 1. Ex1-p144: Complete the dialogue - I have already finished/ done it. - I haven't cleaned and tidied it yet. - I have already turned it off. - I have already called and told her to have lunch with us. 2. Ex2-p144: Ask and answer - Has the flight to Hong Kong departed yet? - No, it hasn't departed yet. - Has the flight to Manila arrived yet? - Yes, it has already arrived. 3. Ex3-p146: Read and check the correct column c) She has finished her homework (Finish) d) He has worked with the computer since early morning (Incomplete) e) We have found the problems with the printer (Finish) f) someone has unplugged the printer (Finish) g) People have received information through the internet recently. (Incomplete) 4. Ex4-146. Complete the.

(259) dialogues 1. Have ... seen did ... see … saw 2. haven't had 3. have been 4. have ... heard 5. happened 6. had 7. fell 8. broke 9. Has ... arrived has arrived did ... arrive arrived. - Explains how to do then asks students to do exercise - Practice in 4 pairs - Asks some students to practice - Practice - Controls and corrects - Write down. 3. Consolidation: (2') - Past simple tense - Present perfect 4. Homework: (1') - Learn words and do exercises again - Prepare unit 16: Geetting started - Listen and read. ******************************************** Written test No 6 Time: 15 minutes I. Question: 1. Write 5 benefits of computers (5 points). 2. Find the odd word (5 points). a. computer b. triangles c. shape d. lemon e. book II. Answers and marks.. printer square chart fruit pen. photocopier question graph melon ruler. cooker oval diagram apple bowl. Câu Đáp án 1. Write 5 benefits - Save the time of computers - Help us learn more effectively with visua aids - Can keep information long and safely - Help us relax by providing interesting games and music. - People can complete their college degree though distance education program online. 2. Find the odd. a. cooker. Điểm 1,0 1,0 1,0 1,0 1,0. 1,0.

(260) word. b. question c. shape d. fruit e. bowl. 1,0 1,0 1,0 1,0. **************************************************** Date of prepare: ……………………… Class 8A.Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Class 8B.Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Period 101. Review the second term. I. AIMS 1. Knowledge - By the end of the lesson, students will be to understand more about all grammar structure they have learned in the second term. - Vocabulary: Revision - Grammar: Present simple tense, passive forms. 2. Skills - Practice writing, listening, reading and doing exercises. 3. Attitude - More hardworking and like subject. II.TEACHING AIDS 1. Teacher: Text book, plan. 2. Students: Text books, notebooks, pens. III. PROCEDURES 1. Check the old lesson: - No check 2. New lesson: - Introduce the new leson (1’) Teacher’s activities I. Warm up:(5') - Pelmanism) - Explains and asks students to practice. Ss' activities. Contents. - Practice in groups. meet – met see – seen make – made ……….. II. Revision:(36') - Asks students to repeat about the present simple. - Repeat and write. I. Revion 1. Present simple tense. go – gone play – played do – done.

(261) tense. - Have students do this exercise. - Listen and practice. - Call some students read the answers. Check up and correct if there is any mistake - Have students repeat about the passive forms. - Read the answers and correct. S + V(s, es) S + do/ does + V Do/ Does + S + V? Yes, S + do/ does No, S + do/ does + not * Exexcise 1: Complete the sentences. Use the correct form of the verbs in the blanks. a. She......... (go) to school every day. b. .......... (Do) you play football? Yes, I do c. He......... (learn) very well. d. ....... (Do) she read book? No, she.......... (do) not. * Answers: a. goes b. Do c. learns d. Does/ does not. - Repeat and write down. 2. Passive forms + Cấu tạo dạng thức bị động: Dạng bị động được cấu tạo bởi dạng của động từ “tobe” và quá khứ phân từ của động từ chính. Be + past participle Với cách cấu tạo này ta có: - Dạng bị động ở thì hiện tại đơn giản: S + tobe + P II - Dạng bị động ở thì quá khứ đơn giản: S + was/ were + P II - Dạng bị động ở thì tương lai đơn giản: S + will + be + P II + Quy tắc biến đổi câu chủ động sang câu bị động: - Tân ngữ trong câu chủ động trở thành chủ ngữ trong câu bị động - Động từ được thay đổi thành hình thức bị động tương ứng. - Động từ trong câu bị động phải cùng một thì với động từ trong câu chủ động. - Chủ ngữ trong câu chủ động.

(262) - Give this exercise and ask them to do. - Listen to the teacher and do exercise. được bỏ đi nếu không rõ, hoặc được hiểu ngầm hoặc không quan trọng * Exercise: Rewite the sentences a. Break the glass into small pieces. b. Then wash the glass with a detergent liquid. c. Dry the glass pieces completely. d. Mix them with certain specific chemical. e. Melt the mixture until it becomes a liquid. f. Use a long pipe, dip it into the liquid, then blow the liquid into intened shapes.. * Answers: - Call some students read the - Read aloud a. The glass is broken into small answers. Check up and and write in the pieces. correct if there is any notebook b. Then the glass is washed with a mistake detergent liquid. c. The glass pieces are dried completely. d. They are mixed with certain specific chemicals. e. The mixture is melted until it becomes a liquid. f. A long pipe is used. It is dipped into a liquid. Then the liquid is blown into indented shapes.. 3. Consolidation: (2') - Repeat about the main content of the lesson. 4. Homework: (1') - Review all grammar structures from unit 12 to unit 14. *********************************************** Date of prepare: ……………………… Class 8A.Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Class 8B.Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Period 102. Review the second term.

(263) I.AIMS 1. Knowledge - By the end of the lesson, students will be to understand more about all grammar structure they have learned in the second term. - Vocabulary: Revision - Grammar: Would you mind +.....? 2. Skills - Practice writing, listening, reading and doing exercises. 3. Attitude - More hardworking and like subject. II.TEACHING AIDS 1. Teacher: Text book, plan. 2. Students: Text books, notebooks, pens. III. PROCEDURES 1. Check the old lesson: - No check 2. New lesson: - Introduce the new leson (1’) Teacher’s activities I. Warm up:(5') Pelmanism - Explains and asks students to practice. - Practice in groups. sit – set be – been say – said. II. Revision - Repeat about the structure: Request. - Listen and take note. I. Revion 1. Would you mind +.....? + Cấu trúc diễn tả yêu cầu lịch sự Would you mind + V-ing.....? Ex: Would you mind turning on TV? + Cấu trúc diễn tả yêu cầu được làm gì: Would/ Do you mind if + V-ed....? Ex: Would/ Do you mind if I closed the door?. - Do exercise. * Exercise: Complete the sentences: a. sit down b. smoke c. turn off the radio.. - Have students do exercise. Ss' activities. Contents go – gone play – played do – done.

(264) d. turn on the air-conditioner. - Call some students do on the board and correct if necessary.. - Do and correct. * Answers: a. Do you mind if I sit down? b. Would you mind if I smoke? c. Do you mind if I turn off the radio? d. Would you mind if I turn on the air-conditioner?. 3. Consolidation: (2') - Repeat about the main content of the lesson. 4. Homework: (1') - Review all grammar structures from unit 12 to unit 14. **************************************************** Date of prepare: ……………………… Class 8A.Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Class 8B.Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Period 103. Review the second term (Cont’) I. AIMS 1. Knowledge - By the end of the lesson, students will be to understand more about all grammar structure they have learned in the second term. - Vocabulary: Revision - Grammar: The past progressive tense, reproted speech.... 2. Skills - Practice writing, listening, reading and doing exercises. 3. Attitude - More hardworking and like subject. II.TEACHING AIDS 1. Teacher: Text book, plan. 2. Students: Text books, notebooks, pens. III. PROCEDURES 1. Check the old lesson: - No check 2. New lesson: - Introduce the new leson (1’) Teacher’s activities I. Warm-up (4’). Ss’ activites. Contents.

(265) - Ask ss some questions: +, How are you today? +, What’s the weather like today?. - Listen and answer. I. Revision:(37') - Have students repeat about - Repeat and the past progressive tense. write down. - Ask students to give some examples - Have students do exercise 1 on page 119 in book. - Call some students read their answers and correct if there is any mistake.. - Give more examples - Listen and do exercises - Read aloud and take note. I. Revision. 1. The past progressive tense. + Formation: (+) S + was/ were + V -ing + O (-) S + was/ were + not + V -ing +O (?) Was/ Were + S + V -ing + O? Yes, S + was/ were No, S + was/ were not. + Usages: - Một hành động đang xảy ra tại một thời điểm xác định / cụ thể trong quá khứ. Thì này thường đi với các trạng từ chỉ thời gian như: at this time, last week… - Một hành động đang diễn ra trong quá khứ thì một hành động khác xen vào. Hành động xen vào thường dùng quá khứ đơn giản thường đi với liên từ “when”. - Hai hay nhiều hành động song song cùng xảy ra 1 thời điểm trong quá khứ thường đi với liên từ “while” * Exercise 1 on page 119. a. Ba was taking a shower at 8:00 last night. b. Hoa was having dinner at 8:00 last night. c. Bao was reading a comic at 8:00 last night. d. Nga was writing a letter at 8:00 last night. e. Na was walking with her dog at 8:00 last night..

(266) - Ask students to repeat about reported speech.. - Repeat and write down. - Have students change these sentences into indirect.. - Listen to the teacher and write. f. Lan was talking to her grandmother at 8:00 last night. 2. Reproted speech. - Chuyển từ câu trực tiếp sang câu gián tiếp cần có những thay đổi sau: +, Thay đổi đại từ nhân xưng, đại từ phản thân, đại từ và tính từ sở hữu. Direct - Ngôi thứ nhất - Ngôi thứ 2 - Ngôi thứ 3 Indirect - Ngôi thứ 3 - Đổi thành cùng ngôi với tân ngữ của mệnh đề chính - Không đổi +, Đổi thì của động từ Direct - Simple present - Present progressive - Future Indirect - Simple past - Past progressive tense - Future in the past. + Những thay đổi khác This - That These - Those Now - Then Here - There Today - That day. - Câu mệnh lệnh gián tiếp S + asked/ told/ ordered/ commanded + O + to + infi.... * Exercise: Change these sentences into indirect. a. “I am a doctor” b. “The floor are dirty” c. “You are intelligent” d. “They must cut now” e. “The pipes are broken” f. You are tired” g. “I can fix the faucets”.

(267) - Call some students read the answers. Check up and correct if there is any mistake.. - Read aloud and correct. * Answers: a. He said he was a doctor. b. She said the floor was dirty. c. They said I was intelligent. d. He said he had to cut then. e. He said the pipes were broken. f. She said I was tired. g. He said he could fix the faucets.. 3. Consolidation: (2') - Repeat the main content of the lesson. 4. Homework: (1') - Review all grammars and words they have learned from unit 15 to unit 16. *************************************************** Date of prepare: ……………………… Class 8A.Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Class 8B.Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Period 104. Review the second term (Cont’) I. AIMS 1. Knowledge - By the end of the lesson, students will be to understand more about all grammar structure they have learned in the second term. - Vocabulary: Revision - Grammar: Present perfect tense, sequence markers. 2. Skills - Practice writing, listening, reading and doing exercises. 3. Attitude - More hardworking and like subject. II.TEACHING AIDS 1. Teacher: Text book, plan. 2. Students: Text books, notebooks, pens. III. PROCEDURES 1. Check the old lesson: - No check 2. New lesson: - Introduce the new leson (1’) Teacher’s activities I. Warm up:(5') - Ask students some. Students’ activites - Listen to the. Contents.

(268) questions: How are you to day? What is the date today?. II. Revision:(37') - Have students repeat about the present perfect tense. - Expain about the present pefect with “yet” and “already”.. - Ask students to change these sentences in to indirect. teacher and answer the questions. - Repeat, listen - Listen and take note. - Do exercise. - Call some students read - Read the answers their answers and correct if aloud and correct there is any mistsake. - Have students repeat. - Repeat and write. I. Revision. 1. Present perfect tense. - Thì hiện tại hoàn thành diễn tả một hành động còn liên quan đến hiện tại. Thì hiện tại hoàn thành dùng với ‘yet’ và ‘already’. ‘Yet’ có nghĩa là “chưa, vẫn chưa” làm việc gì, ‘already’ với nghĩa là “đã làm” việc gì. Vị trí của ‘yet’ và ‘already’ S + have/ has + already + PII + O S + have/ has + not + PII + O + yet. (?) Have / Has + S + PII + O + yet? Ex: I have already had dinner. Have you finished your homework yet? * Exercise: Complete the dialogue. Nam: Have you finished your homework, Hoa? Hoa: .......................................... ., Nam. Nam: What about your clothes? Hoa: I am sorry.......................................... .. Nam: Have you turn the light off yet? Hoa: .......................................... . * Answers: Hoa: I have already finished it Hoa: I have not washed it yet. Hoa: I have already turned it.

(269) about the sequence markers.. - Ask them to do exercise. - Do exercise. - Call some read aloud the answers, checks up and correct if there is any mistake.. - Read aloud and write. off. 2. Sequence markers. - First - Next - Then - After this - Finally * Exercise: Making cucumber salad. - peel / onions. - the cucumbers and the onions - the cucumbers and the onions - the slices - a little salt, sugar ans vinegar to the mixture, the mixture. - for 5 minutes and the salad is ready to serve. * Answers: First, peel the onions; then wash the cucumbers and the onions. Next, slice the cucumbers and the onions. After this, mix a little salt, sugar and vinegar to the mixture. Finally wait for 5 minutes and the salad is ready to serve.. 3. Consolidation: (2') - Repeat basic structures in the lesson. 4. Home work: (1') - Learn by heart structures. - Make sentences with sequence markers. - Redo all exercises in workbook. ***************************************************** Date of prepare: ……………………… Class 8A.Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Class 8B.Date: …………………… Period timetable: ……. Total: …….. Out: …….. Period 105. The second term test. I. AIMS 1. Knowledge.

(270) - Students can know more about grammar structures, vocabulary they have learned in the second term. 2. Skills - To practice doing exercises. 3. Attitude - More hardworking and like subject. II. TEACHING AIDS 1. Teacher: Tests 2. Students: Pens and papers. III. PROCEDURES.

(271)

giao an TIENG ANH 8 ca nam

Tài liệu liên quan

Tài liệu bạn tìm kiếm đã sẵn sàng tải về